JP6690243B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a win / no win lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is to be generated, and the win / loss is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the lottery (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-27480 A

  Further, the display mode of the display device, the voice mode of the speaker, and the like are controlled to be switched depending on various game states. By the way, depending on the timing of switching to a predetermined effect / notification state, the player may be offended.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of switching the effect / notification state according to the gaming status of the player. .

The gaming machine of the present invention,
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Launching means for launching a game ball according to the operation of the operating means,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
A start ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball means,
Based on the detection of the starting entry detecting means, a win / win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and a main control for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / loss lot Means and
Special display means for performing variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the win / no win lottery,
Effect means capable of deriving an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display means,
A sub-control means for controlling the effect means based on information from the main control means,
Firing control means for driving and controlling the firing means,
A launch condition detecting means for detecting whether or not a predetermined launch condition of the launch means is satisfied,
A structure in which a game ball is launched by the launching means in a state where the establishment of the predetermined launching condition is detected by the launching condition detecting means,
When the establishment of the predetermined launch condition is detected by the launch condition detection unit, it is possible to input information indicating that the predetermined launch condition is established to the sub-control unit ,
A passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined portion of the game area,
The starting entry means is configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter.
Based on the detection of the passage detection means, the main control means performs a ball entry support lottery on whether or not the starting ball entry means is in the open state, and when the player wins in the ball entry support lottery. A configuration for causing the starting ball entering means to be in the open state,
The sub control means,
When the starting ball entering means is in the open state, before the starting ball entering means is in the open state, the opening advance notice indicating that the starting ball entering means is in the open state And an opening notice device that can derive
An informing function state in which the opening advance notice is made by the opening advance notice means, and an informing state changing means for changing the state to an informing stop state in which the opening advance notice is not made,
When the information indicating that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied is not input to the sub control unit, the notification stop state is set.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the present invention, the effect / notification state can be switched according to the game situation of the player.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where the inner frame and the front frame set were opened. It is a front view showing a configuration of an inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state where an inner frame, a back pack unit, and the like are opened. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric constitutions of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st classification judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd classification judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows reach judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flow chart which shows discriminating information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart showing a starting winning device control process. It is a flow chart which shows reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payment control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determination of a decorative design etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation stop process. It is a flow chart which shows emission transmission processing. It is a flow chart which shows emission reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows a firing permission command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification state setting process. It is a flow chart which dyes opening notice information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pseudo blade opening control process. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition mode of a decorative symbol display device (holding display area). It is a front view of a starting winning unit, (a) shows a state where a pseudo blade member is in a standby position, (b) shows a state where the pseudo blade member is in a functional position. (A) is a front view of a base plate, (b) is a rear view of a front decoration part (cover unit). It is a perspective view showing a blade member, a pseudo blade member, and the like. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a starting winning unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution regarding the launch of a game ball. It is a handle front view. It is a side view of a handle. It is a rear view of a handle. It is a perspective view of a handle. It is an exploded perspective view showing each component of a handle. It is an exploded perspective view showing each component of a handle. It is a perspective view showing a handle base and the like to which various members are assembled. FIG. 7 is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the conductive ribs and the grounding metal. It is a schematic perspective view for explaining a positional relationship between the conductive ribs and the grounding metal. It is a schematic perspective view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a touch metal fitting and an operating metal fitting. It is a schematic side view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a touch metal fitting and an operating metal fitting.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side portion of the outer frame 11 includes an inner frame as a game board mounting frame. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. Note that in FIG. 3, for convenience, game members (such as nails and accessories) arranged on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy. Each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is made of a material and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, and thereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, the right-side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction thereof. The extended wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12 from the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extension wall 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to project toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed on the inner surface of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly configured by a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with an opening / closing axis line set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be configured so as to be directly openably supported by the outer frame 11 rather than by the inner frame 12.

  Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided in the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are lower trays 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a ball removing lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") as an operating unit (launching operating unit) protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotary operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18a which can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18a is pressed, the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to perform the turning operation of the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while the handle 18 is held.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via a lower plate communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with a banknote, a card or the like inserted into a CR unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation. The rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a CR unit.

  Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removing button 123.

  In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 as effect operation means are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The effect button 125 has a built-in LED, and by pressing the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a corresponding effect is performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 described later, or the effect content is changed. To do.

  Further, a light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the game state and the like. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein is provided. Further, error display lamps 104 that are turned on at the time of a predetermined error are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. It should be noted that a large number of fine through holes are formed above the error display lamps 104 in the annular illumination portion 102 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are separately attached in front and rear pairs, but has a round shape as a whole and is assembled and then attached.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 at the rear side of the window hole 39 while being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a lower portion of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39, is provided with a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launching device is adopted as the launching device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device for guiding the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by the drive of a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 30, a general winning device 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33a as a variable winning means and a starting winning means, and a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device. The unit 35 and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various prize openings such as the general prize device 31, the variable prize device 32, the start prize devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to.

  In the present embodiment, three balls are entered in the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b, ten balls are entered in the general winning device 31, and ten balls are entered in the variable winning device 32. If there are, 14 game balls are paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the game ball but does not enter (is not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. . In addition, while the first start winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured such that the game balls moving in the game area are always enterable or passable, The two-start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change their state between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and the game balls that have not won various winning outlets such as the general winning device 31 have the outlet 36. It is discharged through the game area. Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

  A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround a decorative pattern display device 42 described later. A pair of left and right ball entrances 151 are provided on the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game balls that enter the center frame 47 through the ball entrances 151 are left and right side portions of the decorative symbol display device 42. A warp flow path 152 extending vertically along is guided to a stage 153 formed below the decorative pattern display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters a pocket 154 formed on the inner side of the center of the stage 153. . In addition, the pocket 154 is in communication with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area immediately above the first starting winning device 33a, and the game ball entering the pocket 154 will be described later with a relatively high probability. The first start winning device 33a is adapted to enter the ball.

  A first starting winning device 33a is arranged below the variable display device unit 35. The first starting winning device 33a projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) through which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. It should be noted that the first starting prize device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease with which the game balls enter the first starting prize device 33a.

  A second starting prize device 33b is arranged below the first starting prize device 33a. The second starting winning device 33b is adjacent to the winning opening (starting winning opening) of the second starting winning device 33b into which the game ball can enter, and is provided with a pair of blade members 37 rotatably displaceable. Is equipped with. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip of the blade member 37 and the first starting winning device 33a. The second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball. On the other hand, by changing the blade member 37 to the open position that opens to the outside, a gap through which the game ball passes is secured between the blade member 37 and the first starting winning device 33a, and the second starting winning device 33b plays the game. While the ball is allowed to enter, the game ball moving laterally of the second starting prize device 33b by the blade member 37 is guided to the starting winning opening of the second starting prize device 33b, and is in an open state.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, the unit in which the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized is referred to as a "starting winning unit 401".

  As will be described later in detail, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b each have a variable start detecting means and a first starting winning switch as a starting entrance detecting means for detecting a game ball that has won. 224a and a second start winning switch 224b are provided. When a game ball is detected by the start winning award switch 224a, 224b, a winning / winning lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state or the like is performed, and special display devices 43a, 43b, and a decorative symbol display which will be described later. The device 42 is configured to perform variable display. Then, in the case of winning in the winning / non-winning lottery, the jackpot state as the special game state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is given.

  A variable winning device 32 is provided below the starting winning unit 401. The variable winning a prize device 32, a big winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the big winning opening, a big winning opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a game ball entering the big winning opening. The variable winning a prize device 32 (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state by including a count switch 223 for detecting and drivingly controlling a big winning opening solenoid and opening and closing a shutter.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered, and in the jackpot state, the game ball is in an open state in which a game ball can be won. In addition, in the special winning shutter of the variable winning device 32 of the present embodiment, the lower edge of the large winning shutter is rotatably supported along the lower edge of the special winning opening, and the variable winning device 32 is closed. In the state, the special winning shutter extends vertically to close the special winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the special winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the variable winning device 32, the special winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is slightly inclined rearward downward), and the game ball flows down in front of the special winning opening. Is received on the back surface (upper surface) of the special winning shutter and is guided to the special winning opening.

  Through-gates 34 are arranged in a region located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 (left side region) and a region located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 (right side region) in the game area. ing. The through gate 34 is configured such that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described later in detail, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. In addition, in the present embodiment, the through gate 34 (particularly the through gate switch 225) constitutes a passage detecting means.

  In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b, and the normal symbol display device 41 is also provided. At, a variable display is provided to teach the result of the entry support lottery. When the winning support lottery is won, the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the win / loss lottery, and a "high probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the win / loss lottery. Further, the opening / closing member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high winning state" as the second entering condition that makes it easier to enter the game balls into the second starting winning device 33c, There is a "low ball entry state" as a first ball entry state in which the time period in which the opening / closing member 37 is opened is reduced compared to the high ball entry state. Hereinafter, the state of low probability state and low entry state is called "normal mode", the state of low probability state and high entry state is called "time reduction mode", and high probability state and low entry state A certain state is called a “latent probability mode”, and a state that is a high probability state and a high ball entry state is called a “probability variation mode”.

  In addition, as the high-ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low-ball entry state, (2) one opening time of the second starting prize device 33b ( (Regulated time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second starting winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times of opening the second start winning device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is higher than that in the low ball entry state, (5) A winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is lower than in the low ball entry state There is also a high state. The high-ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations of (2), (4), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or an arbitrary combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high ball entry state”. . As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to frequently win the second start winning device 33b, the number of times the winning / winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. .

  However, in the present embodiment, even in the low entry state, the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is the same as in the high entry state (1.86 seconds), and the entry support lottery is won. In this case, the time for which the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state is shorter than 1.8 seconds in the high entry state, but it is 1.0 seconds in which the entry of the game ball can be expected sufficiently. . Furthermore, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery is also 31/233 (about 1 / 7.5), which is a relatively easy probability of winning as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. As a result, even in the low-ball entering state, the second starting winning device 33b is relatively easily opened, and the variable display of the special symbol is easily held.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the latent probability mode, and the probability variation mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, while the time reduction mode does not require the big hit state to be displayed on the special display device 43a. The variable display 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 are terminated when a preset number of times (100 times in this example) is set in advance, and the normal mode is entered.

  Further, as the jackpot type of the present embodiment, 15 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15RS”), 15 round regular jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15RN”), and two round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “2RS”). ) There is. Regarding “15RS” and “15RN”, it means that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or that eight gaming balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. As a round, it is repeated 15 times before the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, with regard to "2RS", the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds, which is regarded as one round, which is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, with regard to "15RS" and "15RN", although it is a jackpot (so-called "big hit with a coin") in which a large increase in gaming balls can be expected during the jackpot state, "2RS" is a large increase in gaming balls. Is a big hit that is not expected (so-called "big hit without hitting a ball").

  In addition, "probability variation mode" is given after the jackpot state of "15RS", "latent probability mode" is given after the jackpot state of "2RS", and "time saving" after the jackpot state of "15RN". "Mode" (in this example, 100 times of variable display) is given.

  In addition, adjacent to the upper right portion of the substantially elliptical game area, a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / winning lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a is displayed. The special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b for performing variable display for teaching the result of the winning / winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b, and the special display device 43a , 43b, when there is a game ball entering the starting winning apparatus 33a, 33b during the variable display, the first hold display as a hold display means indicating that the variable display corresponding to the ball is held and stored. The device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, and a normal display means for displaying a variation for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 When the game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the pattern display device 41 and the normal symbol display device 41, the normal hold display device 44 indicating that the variable display corresponding to the passage is held and stored. Are provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a as a special display means, and the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold The display device 44 is directly display-controlled by a main control device 261 as a main control means described later.

  The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special figure lamp). Then, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize device 33a, the first special display device 43a is configured to perform a switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp.

  The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special figure lamps). Then, when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, the second special display device 43b is configured to perform switching display (variable display) of the second special figure lamp.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the winning / winning lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (combination of the special map lamps that are lit) is associated with various results of the win / loss lottery, and the winning mode is determined by the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped. The result of the lottery, that is, "big hit" or "miss" is definitely displayed.

  Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, "15RS", "15RN", or "2RS" It is also taught if there is. In addition, there are a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that respectively teach various jackpot types and that they are out of place, and there are a plurality of stop modes. To be done.

  The stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed. Furthermore, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, if the next variable display is not performed even after the stipulated time, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b. The special display device 43b is configured to be switched from a lighting mode showing the result of the win / win lottery to a lighting mode showing a standby state in which no variable display is performed. The lighting mode showing the result of the win / no win lot may be maintained as it is.

  The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b each include two LEDs (first hold lamp, second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, variable display (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize-winning device 33a can be reserved and stored up to four times. Further, the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning a prize device 33b is configured to be able to be reserved and stored up to four times.

  Further, for example, when the first fluctuation display is held once, the first holding lamp on the left side (inside of the game area) is turned on, and when the first fluctuation display is held twice , When the left and right first holding lamps are turned on and the first variation display is held for three times, the left first holding lamp blinks and the right first holding lamp is turned on, and the first variation When the display is held for four times, the left and right first holding lamps blink. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

  The suspended variable display is basically designed to be consumed in the suspended order. However, when both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended, the second variable display is suspended. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting prize device 33b has not been exhausted, the first variation display triggered by the ball of the first starting winning device 33a is displayed. There is no configuration. For example, in a state where one first hold lamp is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second hold lamp is lit, the first variation display is postponed, The second variable display is performed first.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (universal figure lamps). Then, in the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the general symbol lamp on the right side (outer peripheral side of the game area) is blinked (variably displayed). There is. Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the entry support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (combination of lit public figure lamps) and the various results of the entry support lottery are associated with each other, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped. , The result of the ball entry support lottery is definitely displayed. For example, by turning on both of the right and left universal figure lamps, it indicates “winning”, and by turning on only the left side of the universal figure lamps, it indicates “out”.

  The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, which is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34, can be held and stored up to four times. For example, when the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inside of the game area) is turned on, and when held for two times, the left and right normal When the hold lamp is lit and is held three times, the left ordinary hold lamp blinks, and when the right ordinary hold lamp is lit and four times held, the left and right ordinary hold lamps Flashes. When a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

  Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 which is configured by a liquid crystal display device and can display a decorative symbol. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variably display the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, by the sub-control device 262, based on the command from the main control device 261, so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and the display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination. In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42, the speaker SP, and the illumination lamp constitute a rendering means.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of upper, middle, and lower (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, lower symbol display area), and a plurality of types of decoration in each symbol display area. Designs (for example, numerical designs with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each design display area (for example, upper design display area → lower design display area → middle design display The decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state (in the order of the areas). For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special display device 43a, 43b, and the decorative symbol is a jackpot on the decorative symbol display device 42. It is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to (for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area), and the big hit state Is started.

  Further, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous stage, for example, the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper design display region and the lower design display region. Will be done. In this manner, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state in which the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that it is a big hit, and there are cases where it may come off.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is performed (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of an odd-numbered doublet, "15RS" is generated, and in the case of an even-numbered doublet, either "15RS" or "15RN" is generated.

  In addition, the combination of decorative patterns other than the doublet basically teaches “out”, but when it is a big hit of “2RS”, the decorative pattern is specified on the effective line, not the doublet. Is displayed in a stopped manner (combination of chance patterns, so-called chance). In the present embodiment, a combination of chance symbols is a mode in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages (with different backgrounds, etc.) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, a “probability stage” that confirms that you are staying in the probabilistic mode, a “normal stage” that confirms that you are in the normal mode, and a “pullback” that is staying in the time reduction mode. There is a stage. In other words, if the player wins "15RS", the "probability variation stage" is entered after the jackpot state ends. When the player wins "15RN", the game moves to the "pullback stage" after the jackpot state ends, and when the variable display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage, the game moves to the "normal stage". In addition, in the present embodiment, there is a “precursor stage” that shifts after the “2RN” big hit state ends and after the “small hit” state ends. In the "precursor stage", the background changes slightly as compared to the normal stage and the production balance changes (for example, production patterns that are usually difficult to select are easily selected).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display that is performed based on the entry of the game balls into the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (having the right to execute the variable display) is a decorative design. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 45, in the lower portion (holding display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42, a holding icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed. There is.

  In the lower part of the left side area and the right side area, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral portion of the game area. The general winning device 31 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

  Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail constituent portion 51 and an outer rail constituent portion 52 and which guides a game ball shot from the launch device 60 to the upper portion of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball that has been launched along with the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. This prevents the situation where the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail forming portion 52. The game ball that has been launched with a momentum of a predetermined value or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the rail 50 may flow backward, so that the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are removed from the game area. Get burned.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 49, etc., a description will be given centering on the starting winning unit 401 in which the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized.

  The starting winning unit 401 is a substantially plate-shaped base plate 402 mounted in contact with the front surface of the game board 30, and in front of the base plate 402, a distance allowing a game ball to pass is separated from the base plate 402. And a front decorative portion 403 as a substantially disk-shaped front covering means (general portion) that is provided so as to cover at least the first starting winning device 33a and the front of the second starting winning device 33b. There is. The front decoration part 403 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material (for example, polycarbonate), and the game balls that move around the first start winning a prize device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b are used as a front decoration. It is visible through the portion 403.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), FIG. 49, etc., the base plate 402 communicates with the opening formed in the game board 30, and the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b. A pair of upper and lower discharge holes 404a and 404b for discharging the game ball entered in to the rear of the game board 30 through the opening is formed. Further, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided in front of the respective discharge holes 404a, 404b formed in the base plate 402, and have a generally U-shaped cross section that opens upward. The ball receiving portion 405 is provided. A starting winning opening is formed by an opening formed in the upper portion of the ball receiving portion 405. Furthermore, the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 405 has a shape that guides the game ball backward (provided with a portion having a shape that inclines downward to the rear), and enters the ball receiving portion 405 through the starting winning opening. The game ball will be guided to the rear discharge holes 404a and 404b.

  The game nails standing on the front surface of the game board 30 include life nails 406 provided as a pair of left and right above the left and right sides of the start winning opening of the first start prize winning device 33a. The game ball that has passed between 406 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a. In this embodiment, the start winning unit 401 is arranged below the life nail 406 so that the life nail 406 and the front decorative portion 403 do not overlap with each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, in the present embodiment, each ball receiving portion 405 is integrally formed with the front decoration portion 403, and the ball receiving portion 405 is similar to the front decoration portion 403. In addition, it is made of a transparent or translucent resin material (the ball receiving portion 405 of the first starting winning device 33a is a transparent resin). Hereinafter, a member in which the front decorative portion 403 and the ball receiving portion 405 are integrated is referred to as a “cover unit 407”.

  Further, the cover unit 407 is provided with an attachment boss 408 for attaching the cover unit 407 to the base plate 402 integrally with each ball receiving portion 405. The boss hole of the mounting boss 408 opens rearward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47A, a mounting hole 409 is formed in the base plate 402 so as to correspond to the mounting boss 408. By positioning the mounting boss 408 and the mounting hole 409, The cover unit 407 is attached to the base plate 402 by screwing the base plate 402 from the rear surface side. A support rib that projects forward and supports the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 405 may be provided on the base plate 402.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the base plate 402 of the present embodiment extends to the left and right sides of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. Further, the extended portion is formed so as to project forward from the base plate 402, and a left-right pair that guides a game ball moving in the game area on the left and right sides of the front decoration portion 403 to the front decoration portion 403 side. The slider 411 is provided. As shown in FIG. 49 (b), the game ball guided by the slider 411 falls on the blade member 37 in the open position with a relatively high probability when the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state. Then, it is adapted to enter the second start winning device 33b. Further, the base plate 402 is formed with a screw hole 412 for fixing the base plate 402 to the game board 30 with a screw at the extending portion.

  As shown in FIG. 49 and the like, in the present embodiment, an open position that corresponds to the second starting winning device 33b and guides a game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion 405 to the ball receiving portion 405. And the blade member 37 that is displaceable between the closed position that restricts the movement of the game ball to the ball receiving portion 405 side that moves in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion 405, Pseudo-blade member 431 as movable covering means that can be displaced between a functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 in the open position and a standby position capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the blade member 37 has a role of placing the game ball and guiding it to the ball receiving portion 405 when it is in the open position, so that the front and rear width (thickness) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is composed large. On the other hand, in the pseudo blade member 431 arranged in front of the blade member 37 (between the blade member 37 and the front decorative portion 403), the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. In the case (see FIG. 49 (c)), the wall thickness is smaller than that of the blade member 37 so that the game ball can pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member 431 (between the pseudo blade member 431 and the base plate 402). Is configured.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the blade member 37, a blade-side motor 421 that displaces the blade member 37, a substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 having one end connected to the blade member 37, and a blade shaft 425 are provided. A blade side pinion 423 provided on the end side and provided on the blade side drive shaft 422 of the blade side motor 421 and a blade side gear 426 meshing with the blade side pinion 423 are provided. The blade-side motor 421 of this embodiment is electrically connected to a main controller 261 described later. Further, the blade shaft 425 is fixed to the blade member 37 in a state of being inserted into a substantially circular through hole 427 (see FIG. 48B) formed in the blade member 37 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the pseudo blade member 431, a pseudo side motor 432 as a pseudo side driving means for displacing the pseudo blade member 431, and a substantially columnar pseudo shaft 433 having one end connected to the pseudo blade member 431. And a pseudo gear 436 which is provided on the other end side of the pseudo shaft 433 and meshes with a pseudo pinion 435 provided on the pseudo drive shaft 434 of the pseudo motor 432. The pseudo-side motor 432 of this embodiment is electrically connected to a sub control device 262 described later.

  Further, the dummy shaft 433 is inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425, and the dummy blade member 431 is disposed with respect to the front end portion of the dummy shaft 433 that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the blade shaft 425. Is attached, and the pseudo gear 436 is attached to the rear end of the dummy shaft 433 protruding rearward from the rear end of the blade shaft 425. With this configuration, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member 37 and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member 431 extend (substantially) on the same straight line. Has been done.

  In addition, the front end portion of the dummy shaft 433 has a substantially D-shaped cross section, and the front end portion is inserted into a substantially semicircular recess (not shown) formed on the rear surface of the dummy blade member 431. In this state, it is fixed to the pseudo blade member 431. Further, on the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431, a substantially columnar shaft-supporting convex portion 437 formed so as to protrude toward the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431 is provided along with the formation of the concave portion. Has been. As shown in FIG. 47 (b), in the present embodiment, a concave bearing portion 438 into which the shaft support convex portion 437 is inserted is formed on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403. As a result, the front end side of the dummy shaft 433, and by extension, the front end portion side of the blade shaft 425 is supported, and the deformation and displacement of the dummy shaft 433 and the blade shaft 425 can be suppressed. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide a bearing portion that axially supports the lower portion of the outer peripheral edge of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 on the rotation center side.

  Further, in this embodiment, the deformed whale is visually recognized in the starting winning unit 401. That is, as shown in FIG. 46, the substantially disk-shaped front decoration portion 403 is basically provided with a character display portion 441 in which a whale is drawn in a colored and transparent hue, and other than that (around the character display portion 441). ) Is a colorless and transparent general portion 442 (which may be colored and transparent with a lighter hue than the character display portion 441). However, the front display of the whale is not drawn on the character display portion 441. Instead, the pseudo-feather member 431 represents the forelimb of the whale.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, FIG. 48, etc., the pseudo-blade member 431 has a shape (final shape) imagining the forelimb of a whale, and coloring of the whale in the character display portion 441 (for example, semitransparent dark blue) In accordance with the above, it is made of a colored and transparent resin material. When the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position, the whale's forelimbs project to the side of the whale's body. In the present embodiment, the tip portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403 (general portion 442).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49A, in the present embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 at the standby position is located behind the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403 (most of the pseudo blade member 431 is It is configured to be hidden by the character display unit 441). Further, the blade member 37 is also configured to be positioned behind the character display portion 441 when the blade member 37 is in the closed position (the entire blade member 37 in the closed position is hidden by the character display portion 441). In addition, the blade member 37 of this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Further, the blade member 37 has a flat (smooth) surface on the upper surface (game ball guide surface) and the front surface in the open position. The front surface and the rear surface of the pseudo blade member 431 are also flat surfaces.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 48B and 49, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to have a larger area than the blade member 37 in a front view, the blade member 37 is in the open position, and Whether the blade member 431 is in the functional position or the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the entire front surface of the blade member 37 is covered by the pseudo blade member 431. It is supposed to be. Particularly, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49A, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the functional position side of the pseudo blade member 431 is set. The side portion is configured to be located closer to the open position side than the surface of the blade member 37 on the open position side. Further, as shown in FIG. 49B, when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 (the side portion on the standby position side) ), The upper surface of the blade member 37 (game ball guide surface, surface on the standby position side) is positioned above (closed position side).

  Although described later in detail, in the present embodiment, of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 does not operate independently, and when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position. Also, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position while covering the front of the blade member 37. Further, when the vane member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo vane member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position while covering the front of the vane member 37. There is. On the other hand, the pseudo blade member 431 may operate independently, and as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, but the blade member 37 is in the closed position. Is also configured to occur. In other words, it is possible to derive a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member 37 is in the open position (a position other than the closed position) when the blade member 37 is in the closed position.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, in the base plate 402, a region in which the front is covered with the front decorative portion 403, and the blade member 37 that is displaced between the closed position and the open position passes through the front, Further, a light emitting unit 445 is provided at a portion located below the second starting winning device 33b. The light emitting unit 445 is configured by forming a transmission hole in the base plate 402, fitting a prism plate into the transmission hole, and installing a light source behind the prism plate.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 49, the front decoration is provided below the area of the game area where the front is covered by the pseudo-vane member 431 in the functional position (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific covering area”). Although the front part is covered with the portion 403, there is a region where the base plate 402 is not provided. As shown in FIG. 49C and the like, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (book) are provided so as to be adjacent to the lower edge portion (below the specific covering area) of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. Two (in the example, two) game nails (hereinafter referred to as “guide nails 448”) are erected on the game board 30. The plurality of guide nails 448 are arranged lower toward the center portion in the lateral width direction of the start winning unit 401, and basically, the game ball that is in contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448 is the second start. The player is guided to the winning device 33b side.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the blade member 37 is at the open position, the game ball hardly contacts the guide nail 448 located immediately below the blade member 37. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (c), when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it enters the covering area and moves laterally of the blade member 37 in the closed position. The game ball to be played comes into contact with the guide nail 448. The guide nail 448 is arranged adjacent to the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position and the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403. Further, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is also seen in a front view. Since it extends continuously with the character display portion 441, the game ball guided to the guide base 446 side by the guide nail 448 may be hidden behind the dummy blade member 431 or the character display portion 441. Yes, in this case, it becomes difficult to follow the motion of the game ball with eyes.

  Next, the handle 18 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the handle 18 includes a handle base portion 1401 fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotating operation body 1402 as an operation portion rotatably assembled to the handle base portion 1401. A substantially hemispherical cover 1403 fixed to the handle base 1401 on the front side of the rotary operation body 1402, a first gear body 1466 fixed to the rotary operation body 1402, and a variable resistor 1445 as a displacement amount detecting means. , A second gear body 1448 for interlocking the first gear body 1466 and the variable resistor 1445, and a touch sensor 1451 as a touch detection unit. Further, an operation fitting 1405 attached to the rotary operation body 1402, a grounding metal fitting 1406 and a relay metal fitting 1407 for grounding the rotary operation body 1402, and a mainspring spring 1475 for biasing the rotary operation body 1402 in a counterclockwise direction, A stop switch 1455 for stopping the firing of the game ball and a stop lever 18a used for operating the stop switch 1455 are provided. In addition, a third gear body 1408 that meshes with the second gear body 1448 and a biasing spring 1482 that biases the third gear body 1408 in the counterclockwise direction when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated.

(Handle base 1401)
As shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 55, FIG. 56, etc., the handle base 1401 has a substantially cylindrical shape as a whole, and a small diameter portion 1411 located on the rear side and a large diameter portion 1412 located on the front side are partition walls. Separated by 1413. The large diameter portion 1412 is provided with a first cutout portion 1414a (lower left portion in FIG. 55) formed by partially cutting out. A cylindrical central boss 1415 (see FIG. 57) is integrally formed at the center of the partition wall portion 1413.

  Further, cylindrical first, second and third mounting bosses 1417, 1418, 1419 are formed on the partition wall 1413 so as to project forward. The first and second mounting bosses 1417, 1418 are formed at positions close to each other, and the space between the first mounting boss 1417 and the second mounting boss 1418 is forward from the partition wall portion 1413. A column-shaped spring-hanging protrusion 1421 is formed so as to project inward. The spring hooking protrusion 1421 is formed with a hooking groove 1422 extending along the centrifugal direction of the handle base 1401 so as to pass through the center of the front surface of the spring hooking protrusion 1421. Further, the third mounting boss 1419 is formed at a position opposite to the spring hooking protrusion 1421 with the central boss 1415 interposed therebetween.

  In addition, a support shaft 1423 for pivotally supporting the stop lever 18a is formed so as to project forward from the partition wall portion 1413 at a position (upper) near the third mounting boss 1419. Further, the partition wall portion 1413 is formed with insertion holes (not shown) for guiding various wirings to the rear side. The handle base 1401 is made of an insulator (ABS or the like).

(Rotating operation body 1402)
The rotary operation body 1402 includes an annular ring portion 1431, a plurality of finger hooking protrusions 1432 formed to project on the outer periphery of the ring portion 1431, a center attachment portion 1433 located at the center of the ring portion 1431, and a center attachment portion 1433. And connecting portions 1434a and 1434b each having an end portion connected to the ring portion 1431.

  A rear surface side annular groove 1430a (see FIG. 56) into which the large diameter portion 1412 of the handle base 1401 can be inserted is formed on the rear surface side of the ring portion 1431, and a rear end edge of the cover 1403 is formed on the front surface side of the ring portion 1431. A front side annular groove 1430b (see FIG. 55) into which (guide ribs 1441a and 1441b described later) can be inserted is formed.

  The finger hook convex portion 1432 is provided to facilitate the player's gripping and rotating operation of the rotary operation body 1402 by hooking his / her finger. The finger hooking convex portion 1432 of the present embodiment includes a first finger hooking convex portion 1432a on which a thumb (right hand) is mainly hooked, a second finger hooking convex portion 1432b on which an index finger is mainly hooked, and a third finger hooking convex portion on which a middle finger is hooked. 1432c. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is shot, the rotary operation body 1402 is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view, and thus the player's finger is pressed during the rotation operation. The surface (operation surface SH) on the counterclockwise direction side of each finger hook convex portion 1432 extends along the centrifugal direction of the handle 18 (extends substantially perpendicularly to the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 1431). Further, each finger hooking convex portion 1432 has a shape that is opened rearward (see FIG. 56). Incidentally, when the rotary operation body 1402 is returned to the reference position, it is returned by the biasing force of the mainspring spring 1475 even if the player does not rotate the rotary operation body 1402 in the counterclockwise direction. The surface on the direction side is a gentle slope.

  The center attachment portion 1433 is formed by a disc-shaped base plate 1435, a peripheral wall portion 1436 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base plate 1435, and an inner peripheral side of the peripheral wall portion 1436 protruding rearward from the base plate 1435. It includes a 1-gear body boss 1437 and a connection boss 1485. A circular central opening 1486 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion of the base plate 1435. The substantially central enclosure wall portion 1487 that projects forward from the base plate 1435 so as to surround the central opening 1486. Is provided. The inner diameter of the surrounding wall portion 1487 is larger than the diameter of the central opening portion 1486. Furthermore, a spring hook slit 1488 is formed in the surrounding wall portion 1487. In the present embodiment, the first gear body boss 1437 is formed at two locations, each of which is formed with an opening toward the rear side and has an internal thread portion on the inner circumference. Further, the connection boss 1485 is formed on the left side (right side in rear view) of the central opening 1486, has an opening toward the rear side, and has a female screw portion on the inner circumference. In addition, the connection boss 1485 projects rearward more than the first gear body boss 1437.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, on the rear surface side of the rotary operation body 1402, the conductive rib 1428 and the pressing portion 1427 that project rearward from the left connecting portion 1434a in front view are provided. The pressing portion 1427 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the rotary operation body 1402 with respect to the conductive rib 1428. In the present embodiment, the conductive rib 1428 constitutes the earth contact means.

  With such a configuration, the outer peripheral surface of the center mounting portion 1433, both side surfaces of the coupling portions 1434a and 1434b, and the inner peripheral surface of the ring portion 1431 form a substantially arc-shaped first opening 1439A (see FIG. 55 and FIG. Side) and the second opening 1439B (upper side in FIGS. 55 and 56) are formed. In the present embodiment, in the assembled state of the handle 18, the first and second attachment bosses 1417, 1418 are inserted through the second opening 1439B, and the third attachment boss 1417A is inserted through the first opening 1439A. The boss 1419 is inserted. The second opening 1439B has a larger formation width than the first opening 1439A in the rotation direction of the rotary operation body 1402, and in the present embodiment, the second mounting boss 1418 and the right side in the front view (third finger-hanging protrusion). When the connecting portion 1434b of the portion 1432c) abuts, the third mounting boss 1419 and the connecting portion 1434a of the left side in the front view (the first finger-holding convex portion 1432a side) abut and the first mounting boss 1419a abuts. When 1417 and the connecting portion 1434a on the left side in front view come into contact with each other, the third mounting boss 1419 and the connecting portion 1434b on the right side in front view come into contact with each other. Further, in the assembled state of the handle 18, the front end edges of the mounting bosses 1417, 1418, 1419 and the peripheral edge portions of the openings 1439A, 1439B (the front surface of the base plate 1435, the front edge portions of the connecting portions 1434a, 1434b, etc.). ) And become almost flush.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation body 1402 is made of a conductive resin material (having a surface resistivity of 105 to 109 Ω / sq) as an electrostatic diffusion material having electrostatic diffusion. That is, basically, the rotating operation body 1402 does not cause electrostatic discharge (ESD) when static electricity is brought into contact with a charged object, and releases static electricity charged on the object relatively quickly. It has conductivity to the extent possible.

  Further, a conductive metal plating layer is formed on the back surface of the rotary operation body 1402 (the area visible from the back side) and the operation surface SH of the finger-holding convex portion 1432 (where the dotted pattern is added in the figure). There is. However, in the operation surface SH, the metal plating layer is not formed on the front end side of the finger hooking convex portion 1432 and the front side portion. Further, the metal plating layer of the rotating operation body 1402 is formed in a row, and the metal plating layer formed on the back surface of the rotating operation body 1402 and the metal plating layer formed on the operation surface SH of the finger hanging convex portion 1432. Connected (electrically connected). In the present embodiment, of the rotary operation body 1402, a part made of a conductive resin material (a part where the conductive resin material is exposed on the surface) constitutes a static electricity induction part, and a metal plating layer constitutes a touch part. Constitute. A metal plating layer is also formed on the surfaces of the connection boss 1485 and the conductive rib 1428, which is continuous with the metal plating layer formed on the finger-holding convex portion 1432.

(Cover 1403)
The cover 1403 includes a front cover 1403a, a rear cover 1403b inserted inside the front cover 1403a, and an assembly part 1403c for fixing the front cover 1403a and the rear cover 1403b. The front cover 1403a is made of a colored transparent resin, and the rear cover 1403b and the assembly parts 1403c are plated on the parts visually recognized through the front cover 1403a. The cover 1403 is made of an insulator (ABS or the like).

  The front cover 1403a has a substantially hemispherical front cover body 1440a, and extends rearward from the front cover body 1440a slightly inward of the rear edge of the front cover body 1440a. The guide rib 1441a is inserted into the groove 1430b. Further, the guide rib 1441a is formed with a fitting recess 1490 that opens rearward and a locking hole 1491 that penetrates in the outer peripheral direction of the guide rib 1441a.

  The rear cover 1403b has a substantially hemispherical rear cover body 1440b, a guide rib 1441b extending rearward from a rear edge portion of the rear cover body 1440b, and inserted into the front annular groove 1430b of the rotary operation body 1402. Cover bosses 1442, 1443, and 1444 that are formed by projecting rearward from the rear cover body 1440b and have internal threaded portions on the inner circumference so as to face the first to third mounting bosses 1417 to 1419 of the handle base 1401. I have it. The rear cover 1403b is formed to be slightly smaller than the front cover 1403a and can be housed inside the front cover 1403a. Further, the guide rib 1441b has a rearward opening corresponding to the fitting convex portion 1493 protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the guide rib 1441b corresponding to the fitting concave portion 1490 of the front cover 1403a and the locking hole 1491 of the front cover 1403a. Locking recess 1494 is formed. Further, on the rear surface side of the rear cover body 1440b, an assembly boss 1495 protruding rearward and an assembly projection 1496 are formed at a position close to the locking recess 1494.

  The assembly part 1403c includes a part body 1497 fixed to the rear cover 1403b, and a locking projection 1498 protruding from the part body 1497. Further, the part body 1497 is formed with an assembly hole 1499 which is aligned with the assembly boss 1495 and fixed by a screw, and a positioning hole 500 into which the assembly protrusion 1496 is inserted. Then, the rear cover 1403b is inserted inside the front cover 1403a such that the fitting convex portion 1493 is inserted into the fitting concave portion 1490, and the engaging part 1403c is inserted into the engaging hole 1491 aligned with the engaging concave portion 1494. The engaging projection 1498 is inserted, the assembling projection 1496 is inserted into the positioning hole 500, and the rear cover 1403b and the assembling part 1403c are fixed by screwing at the assembling boss 1495 and the assembling hole 1499. As a result, the front cover 1403a and the rear cover 1403b are fixed.

  Further, in the cover 1403 assembled as described above, the cover bosses 1442, 1443, and 1444 have the first to third attachment bosses 1417, 1418, and 1419 inserted into the openings 1439A and 1439B of the rotary operation body 1402. After aligning with (after inserting the rear end portions of the cover bosses 1442, 1443, 1444 into the mounting bosses 1417, 1418, 1419), the handle base portion 1401 (the partition wall portion 1413) is fixed with screws from the rear surface side. By doing so, it is fixed to the handle base 1401.

  The cover 1403 is fixed to the handle base 1401 by inserting the guide ribs 1441a and 1441b into the front annular groove 1430b formed on the front side of the rotary operation body 1402 (first to third of the handle base 1401). By fixing the mounting bosses 1417 to 1419 and the cover bosses 1442 to 1444 of the cover 1403 with screws, the rotary operation body 1402 is sandwiched between the cover 1403 and the handle base portion 1401 (large diameter portion 1412), It will be rotatably attached to the handle base 1401.

(Touch sensor 1451, touch fitting 1452)
The touch sensor 1451 can detect a touch with a human hand based on, for example, a change in capacitance. The touch sensor 1451 includes a metal touch fitting 1452. Further, the touch sensor 1451 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear surface side of the partition wall portion 1413, and the touch metal fitting 1452 is formed on the partition wall portion 1413 near the third mounting boss 1419 and the central boss 1415. It projects forward from the partition wall portion 1413 through an insertion hole (not shown) (see FIG. 57). Further, the tip of the touch metal fitting 1452 is bent at a right angle, and a contact protrusion 1453 protruding forward is formed at the bent portion.

  Further, the touch sensor 1451 can output a signal (touch signal) indicating that the touch fitting 1452 and the operation fitting 1405 of the rotary operation body 1402 are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, the touch sensor 1451 constitutes a touch detection unit, the touch metal fitting 1452 constitutes a touch connection unit, and the touch signal corresponds to the touch information. In addition, when the player does not touch the metal plating layer of the rotary operation body 1402, or when the touch metal fitting 1452 and the operation metal fitting 1405 of the rotary operation body 1402 are insulated, the touch signal is not output. Has become.

(First gear body 1466)
The first gear body 1466 includes a disc-shaped base portion 1467, a substantially columnar step wall portion 1468 protruding rearward from the base portion 1467 at a position on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 1467, and a step wall. A cylindrical assembly boss 1469 that projects rearward from the step wall portion 1468 at a position on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the portion 1468, and a cylindrical support protrusion 1471 that projects forward from the central portion of the base portion 1467. Is equipped with. External teeth 1472 are provided on the outer periphery of the step wall portion 1468. Further, through holes 1470 are formed in the base portion 1467 so as to face two first gear body bosses 1437 provided in the center attachment portion 1433 of the rotary operation body 1402. Then, the support protrusion 1471 is inserted into the central opening 1486 of the center mounting portion 1433 of the rotary operation body 1402, and the base portion 1467 is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the peripheral wall portion 1436 of the center mounting portion 1433 to form the through hole. The first gear body 1466 is fixed to the rotary operation body 1402 by screwing 1470 and the female screw portion of the first gear body boss 1437 in a state of being aligned with each other. When the first gear body 1466 is fixed to the rotary operation body 1402, the support protrusion 1471 projects to the front of the center attachment portion 1433 via the central opening 1486 of the center attachment portion 1433.

  Further, by inserting the assembling boss 1469 into the central boss 1415 of the handle base 1401, the rotary operation body 1402 is assembled to the handle base 1401 (see FIG. 57 etc.). As a result, displacement of the assembly boss 1469 with respect to the central boss 1415 is prevented, and the relative rotation of the rotary operation body 1402 with respect to the handle base 1401 can be performed relatively smoothly.

  Further, in the first gear body 1466, the base portion 1467 is formed with a conduction hole 1473 into which the connection boss 1485 formed in the center attachment portion 1433 of the rotary operation body 1402 can be inserted, and in the vicinity of the conduction hole 1473. In, a positioning protrusion 1474 protruding rearward from the base portion 1467 is provided. As described above, when the first gear body 1466 is attached to the rotary operation body, the connection boss 1485 of the rotary operation body 1402 is in a state of being inserted into the conduction hole 1473 of the first gear body 1466. In this state, the rear surface of the base portion 1467 of the first gear body 1466 and the rear end surface of the connection boss 1485 are substantially flush with each other. The first gear body 1466 is made of an insulator (ABS or the like).

(Variable resistor 1445)
The variable resistor 1445 has a resistor body 1446 and a rotation shaft 1447 protruding from the resistor body 1446. Then, the resistor body 1446 is attached to the rear surface side of the partition wall portion 1413 so that the rotary shaft 1447 is inserted into the communication hole 1426 (see FIG. 53) formed in the partition wall portion 1413 of the handle base portion 1401. . Note that the variable resistor 1445 and the second gear body 1448 are not shown in FIG. 53. Further, the rotating shaft 1447 has a non-circular cross section (substantially D-shaped) and is freely rotatable with respect to the resistor body 1446 by 360 °. The resistor body 1446 has a variable resistance value according to the rotation angle of the rotary shaft 1447 and can output a signal (dial position signal) relating to the resistance value. When the rotating shaft 1447 (rotating operation body 1402) is at the reference position, the dial position signal is not output. In the present embodiment, the dial position signal corresponds to the displacement amount information.

(Second gear body 1448)
A second gear body 1448 is fitted in the rotary shaft 1447 of the variable resistor 1445 in an inserted state. External teeth 1449 are formed on the outer periphery of the second gear body 1448. When the rotary operation body 1402 is assembled to the handle base 1401, the outer teeth 1472 of the first gear body 1466 and the outer teeth 1449 of the second gear body 1448 mesh with each other. Therefore, when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated clockwise, the second gear body 1448 rotates counterclockwise as the first gear body 1466 rotates clockwise. Rotate. When the rotation operation body 1402 rotates counterclockwise, the second gear body 1448 rotates clockwise as the first gear body 1466 rotates counterclockwise. To do.

(Spring spring 1475)
As shown in FIG. 55, a mainspring spring 1475 as a biasing means includes a coil portion 1476 wound in a coil shape and hook portions 1477 and 1478 extending outward from both ends of the coil portion 1476. There is. The coil portion 1476 is configured such that, on the front surface side of the rotary operation body 1402, the support protrusion 1471 of the first gear body 1466 protruding forward through the central opening portion 1486 of the center attachment portion 1433 is inserted inward. It is installed in a housing groove formed between 1471 and the surrounding wall portion 1487 of the rotary operation body 1402. Then, one hook portion 1477 is locked to the spring hook slit 1488 of the enclosing wall portion 1487 of the rotary operation body 1402, and the other hook portion 1478 is forward of the rotary operation body 1402 via the second opening 1439B. It is locked in the hooking groove 1422 of the spring hooking protrusion 1421 of the protruding handle base 1401. As a result, the rotary operation body 1402 is biased in the counterclockwise direction (in a front view) by the biasing force of the main spring 1475.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58A, the rotary operation body 1402 that receives a rotational stress in the counterclockwise direction due to the biasing force of the mainspring 1475 has one side (the right side when viewed from the front) in the non-operation state. The connecting portion 1434b comes into contact with the second mounting boss 1418, and the other (left side in front view) connecting portion 1434a comes into contact with the third mounting boss 1419, so that further rotation of the rotary operation body 1402 is prevented. Rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted. The position of the rotary operation body 1402 at this time is the reference position. Further, the relative rotation position of the second gear body 1448 (rotation shaft 1447) at this time becomes the reference state in which the rotation operation amount is zero, and the resistance value of the resistor body 1446 of the variable resistor 1445 in this state is The value corresponds to zero dynamic operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the rotary operation body 1402 in the clockwise direction against the biasing force of the mainspring 1475, the first gear body 1466 attached to the center attachment portion 1433 of the rotary operation body 1402 is also moved. Rotate clockwise. Since the outer teeth 1472 of the first gear body 1466 mesh with the outer teeth 1449 of the second gear body 1448, the second gear body 1448 moves counterclockwise as the first gear body 1466 rotates. Rotate. When the second gear body 1448 rotates, the rotary shaft 1447 also rotates, and the resistor body 1446 of the variable resistor 1445 takes a resistance value according to the rotation angle of the rotary shaft 1447, and the resistance value thereof Is output.

(Operating bracket 1405)
On the rear surface side of the base portion 1467 of the first gear body 1466, an operating fitting 1405 having a substantially C shape as a whole is provided on the lower left side (lower right side in rear view) of the step wall portion 1468 of the first gear body 1466. It is provided so as to surround a range of about 180 degrees. That is, the operation fitting 1405 is provided so as to extend along the displacement direction of the rotary operation body 1402. The operation fitting 1405 includes a fixing portion 1701 fixed to the rear surface of the base portion 1467, and a diagonal portion from the end edge of the fixing portion 1701 on the counterclockwise direction side (clockwise direction in rear view) toward the counterclockwise direction side. A step portion 1704 extending rearward, and a contact side portion 1705 extending substantially parallel to the fixed portion 1701 from the counterclockwise side end edge of the step portion 1704 are provided. It is formed by bending a sheet of metal plate.

  The fixing portion 1701 is aligned with the alignment hole 1702 through which the positioning protrusion 1474 of the first gear body 1466 is inserted, and the connection boss 1485 of the rotary operation body 1402 inserted into the conduction hole 1473 of the first gear body 1466, A connection hole 1703 to be screwed is formed. Further, as described above, the first gear body 1466 is made of an insulator, but on the surface of the connection boss 1485 (including the inner peripheral side of the female screw), the operation surface SH of the finger hooking protrusion 1432 or the like is formed. The metal plating layer is formed continuously with the formed metal plating layer. Then, the connection boss 1485 and the operation fitting 1405 are fixed in contact with each other by a metal screw, so that the rotary operation body 1402 and the operation fitting 1405 are electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the contact convex portion 1453 of the touch fitting 1452 of the touch sensor 1451 attached to the handle base 1401 and the operation fitting 1405 fixed to the rotary operation body 1402 can come into front and back contact. . When the touch fitting 1452 and the operating fitting 1405 are in contact with each other, the rotary operating body 1402 (metal plated layer) and the touch sensor 1451 are electrically connected to each other via the operating fitting 1405, and the touch sensor 1451 rotates the rotary operating body. It is configured to be able to detect that the player's hand touches 1402.

  However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60A and 61A, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position (in the non-operation state, the urging force of the spring spring 1475 causes the rotation operation body 1402 to move to the reference position). When held), the contact protrusion 1453 of the touch fitting 1452 is located on the side of the step portion 1704 of the operation fitting 1405, and the touch fitting 1452 and the operation fitting 1405 are separated from each other. That is, the rotary operation body 1402 and the touch sensor 1451 are electrically insulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60 (b) and FIG. 61 (b), when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotationally operated, the contact convex portion 1453 of the touch fitting 1452 is provided in the step portion 1704 and the contact side portion 1705. It is configured to come into contact with the operation fitting 1405. In the present embodiment, the operation fitting 1405 constitutes the touch contact means.

  Further, since the operation fitting 1405 has a step portion 1704 and is formed into a leaf spring shape that can be bent back and forth, when the rotating operation body 1402 is rotated, the contact convex portion 1453 of the touch fitting 1452 has a contact side portion. The contact side portion 1705 is slightly bent by being pressed into contact with the contact side portion 1705 and slidably contacts the contact side portion 1705. Therefore, when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated, the touch fitting 1452 and the operation fitting 1405 can be surely brought into contact with each other. In addition, the fixed portion 1701, the step portion 1704, and the step portion 1704 side portion of the contact side portion 1705 are configured to be wider than the tip side portion of the contact side portion 1705, thereby stabilizing the fixed state, The elastic force is ensured. The presence of the contact convex portion 1453 can reduce the frictional force at the time of sliding contact, and can suppress the deterioration of the operability of the rotary operation body 1402.

(Earth metal fitting 1406)
A ground metal fitting 1406 is provided on the front surface side of the partition wall portion 1413 between the central boss 1415 and the third mounting boss 1419, that is, in the vicinity of the touch metal fitting 1452 which penetrates the partition wall portion 1413 and projects forward. ing. The earth metal fitting 1406 includes an attachment portion 1711 fixed to the front surface of the partition wall portion 1413 in an abutting state, an extension portion 1713 extending forward from the attachment portion 1711, and a front side of a side portion of the extension portion 1713. And a contact piece 1714 extending substantially orthogonally from the extending portion 1713 and formed by bending one sheet metal. An attachment hole 1712 is formed in the attachment portion 1711 so as to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. The earth metal fitting 1406 and the touch metal fitting 1452 are separated from each other and electrically insulated.

(Relay metal fitting 1407)
Further, a relay metal fitting 1407 is provided on the front surface side of the partition wall portion 1413 so as to partially overlap the ground metal fitting 1406. The relay metal fitting 1407 includes a screw fastening portion 1721 screwed to the partition wall portion 1413 in a state of being in contact with the fixing portion 1701 of the ground metal fitting 1406, and a lead portion 1723 extending rearward from the side of the screw fastening portion 1721. , Are integrally formed of metal. A retaining hole 1722 penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the screw fastening portion 1721, and is aligned with a screw hole (not shown) formed in the partition wall portion 1413 together with the mounting hole 1712 of the mounting portion 1711 of the earth metal fitting 1406. The mounting portion 1711 of the grounding metal fitting 1406 is sandwiched between the partition wall portion 1413 and the partition wall portion 1413 and is fixed to the partition wall portion 1413 with a metal screw. As a result, the ground metal fitting 1406 and the relay metal fitting 1407 are electrically connected.

  Further, the lead portion 1723 extends to the rear of the partition wall portion 1413 via an insertion hole (not shown) formed in the partition wall portion 1413, and is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame set 14 via wiring (not shown). , And is electrically connected to a reinforcing sheet metal 1028 (see FIG. 3) that is electrically grounded. As a result, the ground metal fitting 1406 is electrically grounded (grounded) via the relay metal fitting 1407 and the like. In the present embodiment, the ground metal fitting 1406 and the relay metal fitting 1407 constitute the ground connection means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the conductive rib 1428 provided on the rear surface side of the rotary operation body 1402 (connecting portion 1434a) and the contact piece 1714 of the grounding metal fitting 1406 can come into contact with each other in the rotating direction of the rotary operation body 1402. Has become. By bringing the conductive rib 1428 into contact with the ground metal fitting 1406, the rotary operating body 1402 is electrically grounded (grounded) via the ground metal fitting 1406, the relay metal fitting 1407, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58A and 59A, when the rotary operation body 1402 is in the reference position (in the non-operation state, it is held in the reference position by the urging force of the spring spring 1475). (When the conductive ribs 1428 are shown), the conductive ribs 1428 of the rotary operation body 1402 (the conductive ribs 1428 have a dotted pattern in FIG. 59) and the contact pieces 1714 of the grounding metal fitting 1406 come into contact with each other. . On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotationally operated, the conductive rib 1428 and the contact piece 1714 are separated from each other. That is, when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated clockwise from the reference position, the rotary operation body 1402 and the grounding metal fitting 1406 are electrically insulated.

  In addition, since the contact piece 1714 of the grounding metal fitting 1406 has a leaf spring shape, the rotating operation body 1402 is in a non-operating state, and the rotating operation body 1402 is held at the reference position by the urging force of the power spring 1475. In this state, the conductive rib 1428 of the rotary operation body 1402 is in pressure contact with the contact piece 1714 while slightly bending the contact piece 1714. Therefore, the conductive rib 1428 and the contact piece 1714 can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  The relay metal fitting 1407 and the ground metal fitting 1406 are provided at positions where they do not come into contact with the operation fitting 1405 even when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated. Further, the conductive rib 1428 of the rotary operation body 1402 is provided at a position where it does not come into contact with the touch fitting 1452 even if the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated.

(Third gear body 448)
As shown in FIG. 55, FIG. 58, etc., a third gear body 1408 is provided on the side of the second gear body 1448 so as to be rotatable with respect to the partition wall portion 1413. External teeth 1481 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the third gear body 1408. When the rotary operation body 1402 is assembled to the handle base 1401, the outer teeth 1449 of the second gear body 1448 and the outer teeth 1481 of the third gear body 1408 mesh with each other.

(Biasing spring 1482)
A mainspring spring (biasing spring 1482) for biasing the third gear body 1408 in the counterclockwise direction at the time of rotating the rotary operation body 1402 has one end formed in a recess formed in the third gear body 1408. While being locked, the other end is also locked by a spring protrusion 1483 projecting forward from the partition wall portion 1413. As a result, the second gear body 1448 is biased in the clockwise direction via the third gear body 1408. Therefore, the second gear body 1448 and the first gear body 1466 are surely brought into pressure contact with each other when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated, and rattling of the second gear body 1448 is suppressed, and the variable resistor 1445 is used. The amount of rotation of the rotary operation body 1402 can be detected more accurately.

(Stop switch 1455)
As shown in FIG. 57 and the like, a stop switch 1455 as a non-stop operation detecting means includes a tongue-shaped pressing operation portion 1456 and a protrusion (not shown), and is provided in the large diameter portion 1412 (upper side of the central boss 1415). ), It is screwed to the partition wall portion 1413. The projecting portion is always maintained in the projecting state by the urging force of the spring built in the stop switch 1455, whereby the pressing operation portion 1456 is pushed out in the projecting direction. On the other hand, when the push operation portion 1456 is pushed, the protrusion portion is set in against the biasing force. Further, the stop switch 1455 can output a signal (a firing switch signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion 1456 is not operated (the protruding portion is not depressed). In this embodiment, when the launch switch signal is not confirmed by the launch control circuit 312 or the like, the launch of the game ball is stopped (prohibited). In the present embodiment, the firing switch signal corresponds to the non-stop operation information.

(Stop lever 18a)
As shown in FIG. 57 and the like, the stop lever 18a serving as a stop operating means includes a lever main body portion 1459 having a shaft hole 1464 axially supported by a support shaft 1423 projecting forward from the partition wall portion 1413 of the handle base portion 1401. An operating portion 1461 that extends from the lever main body portion 1459 to the outer peripheral side of the handle 18 and projects to the outside of the large diameter portion 1412 via the first cutout portion 1414a of the large diameter portion 1412, and a pressing operation of the stop switch 1455. The portion 1456 and the pressing action portion 1462 capable of abutting are provided. Then, when the operation portion 1461 is pressed toward the inner peripheral side of the handle 18, the stop lever 18 a rotates around the support shaft 1423, and the pressing action portion 1462 presses the tip of the pressing operation portion 1456. When the pressing operation unit 1456 is pressed, the projecting portion of the stop switch 1455 is depressed, whereby the pressing operation of the stop lever 18a is detected by the stop switch 1455.

  Further, the stop lever 18a is provided with a hooking portion 1460 (see FIG. 57) protruding forward from the lever main body portion 1459. When the rotary operation body 1402 is not operated, the pressing portion 1427 (see FIG. 56) formed on the rear surface side of the rotary operation body 1402, which is constantly biased counterclockwise by the mainspring spring 1475, and the hooking portion 1460. While pressing, the pressing action portion 1462 and the pressing operation portion 1456 are pressed together, and the protruding portion of the stop switch 1455 is depressed. That is, when the rotary operation body 1402 is in the reference position, the game ball is not shot (even when the player touches the rotary operation body 1402). In the present example, the mainspring spring 1475 and the pressing portion 1427 form a forced stop means.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position as described above, the operation fitting 1405 and the touch fitting 1452 are separated from each other, and the rotation operation body 1402 and the touch sensor 1451 are electrically connected. Insulated. Therefore, even if the hook portion 1460 of the stop lever 18a and the pressing portion 1427 of the rotary operation body 1402 are omitted, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position, the player moves the handle 18 (rotation operation body 1402). It is possible to prevent the game ball from being fired even by touching it. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  Next, a procedure for assembling the handle 18 configured as described above will be described.

  First, the first gear body 1466 is attached to the center attachment portion 1433 of the rotary operation body 1402, and the operation fitting 1405 is attached to the first gear body 1466. Further, with respect to the handle base 1401, the touch sensor 1451, the variable resistor 1445, the second gear body 1448, the third gear body 1408, the ground metal fitting 1406, the relay metal fitting 1407, the stop switch 1455, the stop lever 18a, etc. are at predetermined positions. Will be placed.

  More specifically, the touch sensor 1451 is attached to the rear surface side of the partition wall portion 1413, and the touch metal fitting 1452 is projected in front of the partition wall portion 1413. The variable resistor 1445 is attached to the rear surface side of the partition wall 1413, and the rotating shaft 1447 is projected in front of the partition wall 1413. Further, the second gear body 1448 is attached to the rotary shaft 1447 that protrudes forward of the partition wall portion 1413. Further, the third gear body 1408 is installed so as to mesh with the outer teeth 1449 of the second gear body 1448. In addition, a biasing spring 1482 having one end locked to the third gear body 1408 and the other end locked to the spring protrusion 1483 of the handle base 1401 is attached.

  Further, the ground metal fitting 1406 and the relay metal fitting 1407 are attached to the front surface side of the partition wall portion 1413. Further, a wire (not shown) electrically connected to the reinforcing metal plate 1028 (see FIG. 3) is electrically connected to the lead portion 1723 of the relay metal fitting 1407 extending rearward from the partition wall portion 1413. As a result, the ground metal fitting 1406 is electrically grounded via the relay metal fitting 1407 and the like. In addition, the stop switch 1455 is installed, and the stop lever 18a is installed so that the shaft hole 1464 is inserted into the support shaft 1423.

  Subsequently, the assembling boss 1469 of the first gear body 1466 attached to the rotating operation body 1402 is inserted into the central boss 1415 of the handle base portion 1401 and the rotating operation body 1402 is attached to the handle base portion 1401. . In addition, the large-diameter portion 1412 of the handle base 1401 is inserted into the rear annular groove 1430a of the rotary operation body 1402 along with the insertion of the assembling boss 1469 into the central boss 1415, and further, the second gear body. The outer teeth 1449 of the 1448 and the outer teeth 1472 of the first gear body 1466 mesh with each other. As described above, when the assembly of the rotary operation body 1402 to the handle base 1401 is completed, the relative rotation of the assembly boss 1469 with respect to the central boss 1415, that is, the relative rotation of the rotary operation body 1402 with respect to the handle base 1401 is possible. Becomes

  After that, the coil portion 1476 of the main spring 1475 is installed on the front surface side (accommodation groove) of the rotary operation body 1402, and one hook portion 1477 is provided on the surrounding wall portion 1487 of the rotary operation body 1402 (center attachment portion 1433). The hook portion 1478 is locked to the spring hook slit 1488, and the other hook portion 1478 is locked to the hook groove 1422 of the spring hook protrusion 1421 provided forward from the partition wall portion 1413. As described above, by mounting the mainspring spring 1475, the rotary operation body 1402 is biased in the counterclockwise direction.

  Further, the cover 1403 is constructed by assembling the front cover 1403a and the rear cover 1403b using the assembly parts 1403c. Finally, the guide ribs 1441a and 1441b of the cover 1403 are inserted into the front annular groove 1430b, and the first to third mounting bosses 1417 to 1419 of the handle base 1401 and the cover bosses 1442 to 1444 of the cover 1403 are aligned. Then, the cover 1403 is fixed to the handle base 1401 by screwing the large diameter portion 1412 from the rear side of each.

  The handle 18 configured as above has a structure in which when the rotary operation body 1402 is in the non-operated state and the rotary operation body 1402 is held at the reference position by the urging force of the mainspring 1475. The conductive rib 1428 protruding on the rear surface side and the ground metal fitting 1406 are brought into contact with each other, and the operation metal fitting 1405 fixed to the rotary operation body 1402 and the touch metal fitting 1452 are separated from each other. That is, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position, the rotary operation body 1402 is electrically grounded, and even if the player touches the rotary operation body 1402, the game ball is not shot. ing. In other words, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position, even if the player who touches the rotary operation body 1402 is charged with static electricity, the static electricity does not flow to the touch sensor 1451 side and is released to the ground. Becomes

  On the other hand, when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated clockwise, the conductive rib 1428 and the ground metal fitting 1406 are separated from each other, and the operation metal fitting 1405 and the touch metal fitting 1452 are brought into contact with each other. That is, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at a position that is rotationally displaced from the reference position by a predetermined amount, it is detected by the touch sensor 1451 that the player is operating the rotary operation body 1402, and the rotation operation body 1402 is rotated. A game ball will be launched with a strength according to the amount of movement. In addition, at this time, electricity does not flow to the ground side, and the contact of the player's hand can be reliably detected.

  Although a metal plating layer is formed on the surface of the rotating operation body 1402, the metal plating layer is formed on the rear surface of the rotating operation body 1402 and the tip of the finger hanging convex portion 1432 of the operation surface SH of the finger hanging convex portion 1432. It is formed in the part excluding the part and the front end part. That is, the metal plating layer is formed only on a part of the operation surface SH in the range touched by the player's hand. Therefore, when the player starts operating the handle 18, when the rotating operation body 1402 is gripped, the conductive resin is exposed before the portion of the rotating operation body 1402 where the metal plating layer is formed. It is easy to contact the part where Therefore, when the player grips the rotary operation body 1402, first, the conductive resin of the rotary operation body 1402 is exposed relatively quickly without the static electricity charged on the player causing electrostatic discharge. The static electricity flows to the part where it is present and is released to the ground via the conductive rib 1428 of the rotary operation body 1402, the ground metal fitting 1406, the relay metal fitting 1407, and the like.

  Further, when the player rotates the rotary operation body 1402, he / she puts his / her finger on the operation surface SH of the finger-holding convex portion 1432 and pushes it in the clockwise direction. Therefore, when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated, the metal plating layer formed on the operation surface SH of the finger hooking convex portion 1432 comes into contact with the player's finger. Further, since the rotary operation body 1402 is biased in the counterclockwise direction by the mainspring spring 1475, even when the rotary operation body 1402 is held at the predetermined rotation position, it is formed on the operation surface SH of the finger hook convex portion 1432. The formed metal plating layer comes into contact with the player's finger. Therefore, when the rotary operation body 1402 is rotated, the metal plating layer, the operation metal fitting 1405, and the touch metal fitting 1452 which are integrally formed with the operation surface SH of the finger-holding convex portion 1432 of the rotary operation body 1402, the conductive rib 1428, and the like. The touch sensor 1451 detects the contact of the player with the rotary operation body 1402 through the various metal parts (portions and members made of a material having electrostatic conductivity).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation body 1402 is rotationally operated, and the operation fitting 1405 and the touch fitting 1452 come into contact with each other to shoot a game ball, but the operation fitting 1405 and the touch fitting 1452 are The shooting strength of the game ball when the contact state is changed from the non-contact state to the contact state of the game ball is the rail 50 (the portion where the inner rail constituent portion 51 and the outer rail constituent portion 52 extend in parallel). The strength is set to reach the boundary between the tip and the game area (see FIG. 4). Of course, by further rotating the rotating operation body 1402, the launch strength of the game ball gradually increases, and in the state where the rotating operation body 1402 is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction, the game ball is It will collide with the return rubber 54.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 is provided with a lower plate communication passage 71 connected to a discharge mechanism section 352, which will be described later, to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected to the upper tray 19 from the discharge mechanism section 352. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 (outer rail forming portion 52) provided on the front surface side of the inner frame 12, and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed for guiding the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball fired from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns backward on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball goes to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Is discharged.

  Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion of the lower plate communication passage 71 on the inlet side. In addition, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective inlets and the payout passage 67 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be discharged to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting the game balls located in the lower plate communication passage 71. By the existence of the full detection switch, it is understood that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display on the decorative pattern display device 42, voice, etc. Is controlled. It should be noted that, when the retention of the game ball in the lower plate communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is released.

  Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so that they are partially overlapped with each other in the front and back. Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. A protective cover made of resin or the like is attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

  First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover for covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub control device 262 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked in front and back. Is attached to.

  The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42a in which an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is housed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving the LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is provided. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

  Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 having the main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  Main controller 261 is housed in substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball detection switch that detects the game balls that have entered the various winning openings, corresponding to the various winning openings of the general winning apparatus 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general prize switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize device 31, and a variable prize device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. In addition, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although illustration is omitted, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board which is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. There is. The first board-side relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start prize winning switch 224a and the second start prize winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main controller 261 sends a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout controller 311, and a predetermined number of game balls based on an output signal from the payout controller 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, on the back surface of the game board 30, although not shown, a special winning opening solenoid for opening the special winning opening in the variable winning device 32 is provided. Further, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the blade-side motor 421 that drives the blade member 37 to open and close as described above. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is one in which a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated. The back pack unit 203 is openably and closably supported with respect to the left side portion (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an opening / closing axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (big hit state, probability variation mode, etc.), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91, 92 described later. 12 terminals for outputting information regarding opening, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower bowl full error, tank ball out error, dispensing error, award paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information regarding the number of balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of ABS resin, for example, and is provided with a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 having an opening on the upper side is provided, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls is appropriately paid out by a predetermined electric configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in a main power source from the outside is installed. There is. Main power of 24 V AC, for example, is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), a lower frame set 251 which is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and which can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collecting mechanism flow, and the game balls are provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings of the general winning device 31 and the like are collected through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In addition, in the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply / launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked in front and back. Has been. The power supply / launch control device 310 includes a firing control circuit 312 serving as a firing control means and a power supply circuit 313, is housed in a board box 313a, and is fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / firing control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member similarly to the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is housed, so that the traces of the unsealed board box 311a remain. There is.

  In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / launch control device 310). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually confirmed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout motor occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and can restore the state at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power shutdown is stored and retained. Therefore, when the user wants to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, the power is pressed while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Throw in.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into a key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the cylinder lock 700 is rotated to one side to move the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion on the front surface side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion on the rear surface side (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be retracted from and into the switch body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by the detection unit being pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed by the pressing part 86 formed integrally with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11 to detect the detection part. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control unit 261 as a main control unit is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be configured into a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

  Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data will be backed up.

  In the case where the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is in a power-off state (including a power outage in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the values of stack pointers, registers, I / O, etc. The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein through a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, etc. are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, and a power source are provided in the input / output port 505. -Various substrates such as the firing control device 310, the payout control device 311, the sub-control device 262, the hold display devices 46a and 46b, the normal hold display device 44, the solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and the second start winning device. Various electric parts such as a blade-side motor 421 for opening and closing 33b (blade member 37) are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal portions and the like constitute the input / output port 505.

  The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 as an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and a ROM 552 storing fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. In addition to a RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the above, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit not shown Is equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, the RAM 553, and the display control device 45 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555. Furthermore, the input / output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the illumination parts and the lamps 102 and 104, the pseudo side motor 432 for operating the pseudo blade member 431, and the like.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, the present embodiment teaches that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 have won the jackpot, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the decorative symbol variable display is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable symbol display of the special symbols in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

  Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511, the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all the data stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 513a is stored. Is backed up. Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer at the time of power-off, each register, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off and the power is turned off again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, similarly to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured such that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout control device 311 permits payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261. And a command buffer in which the commands sent from are stored.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main control device 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is initialized. It is turned off when the process is performed or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, as the specific commands, the payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, the prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls, and the main control device 261 are restored. There are three payout return commands transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any of the commands is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, the initial setting process or the power shutdown. It is turned off when it is returned to the previous state, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment processing is judged.

  The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from main controller 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and if the commands are stored in all storage areas, they are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control circuit 312, a payout device 358, a CR unit connection board 314, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The CR unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a CR unit (card reader unit, which is arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like). The ball lending unit) and the payout control device 311 are electrically connected to each other. Then, information about the ball lending operation section by the player or the ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the game value balance is stored in the card which is a recording medium inserted in the CR unit. When it is, the balance of the card is subtracted, and the payout request signal of the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type and may be a coin type or a stick type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control device 311 sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected, to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / firing control device 310. Is output periodically (every 2 msec).

  The launch control circuit 312 of the power / launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of a game ball by the launch device 60. As shown in FIG. 50, the firing control circuit 312 includes a driving IC 561 for driving the launching device 60 and the ball feeding device 63, and an adjusting IC 562 for adjusting the launching strength (launching speed) of the launching device 60. I have it. Further, the launch control circuit 312 sends a signal (a launch state signal) to the main control device 261 to the effect that the predetermined launch condition is met when the predetermined launch condition of the game ball is met. When the condition transmission circuit 564 to be transmitted and the main control device 261 are receiving the emission state signal from the condition transmission circuit 564, the signals (emission permission signal, ball feed signal) transmitted from the main control device 261 are received. The permission reception circuit 565 is provided.

  The handle 18, the payout control device 311, and the main control device 261 are electrically connected to the condition transmission circuit 564. The condition transmission circuit 564 receives the dial position signal from the variable resistor 1445 indicating the amount of rotation operation of the handle 18 (rotation angle of the rotation operation body 1402) from the handle 18, and the player operates the handle 18 (rotation operation body 1402. It is configured to be able to receive a touch signal from the touch sensor 1451 indicating that the operation surface SH) is being touched and a firing switch signal from the stop switch 1455 indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18a. ing.

  Furthermore, the condition transmission circuit 564 is configured to be able to receive from the payout control device 311 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

  Then, the condition transmission circuit 564 transmits a firing state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are received. In this embodiment, the firing state signal corresponds to the firing state information.

  The main control device 261 transmits the launch permission signal and the ball feed signal to the permission receiving circuit 565 on condition that the launch state signal is received. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to transmit the firing permission signal at an interval of 0.6 seconds while the firing state signal is being input. In the present embodiment, the launch permission signal corresponds to the launch permission information.

  The condition transmission circuit 564 is also electrically connected to the permission reception circuit 565, and when the dial position signal, the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are received, these signals are transmitted. (Alternatively, signals corresponding to these) are transmitted to the permission receiving circuit 565.

  The permission reception circuit 565 transmits the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, the firing permission signal, and the ball feed signal to the driving IC 561 and the dial position signal to the adjustment IC 562. Is configured.

  The driving IC 561 is configured to drive the ball feeding device 63 and send the game ball to the launch position when the ball feeding signal is received. The driving IC 561 is provided in the ball feeding device 63 and is electrically connected to the preparation ball detection sensor 64 capable of detecting whether or not the game ball is present at the launch position. Then, in the state in which it is detected that the game ball already exists at the launch position by the preparation ball detection sensor 64, the ball feeding device 53 is not driven (even if the ball feed signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position). It is like this.

  Further, the driving IC 561 is configured to drive the firing device 60 (fire solenoid) on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, and the firing permission signal are received. . As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with the strength adjusted by the adjusting IC 562.

  In addition, the power supply circuit 313 is a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It has and.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside and generates + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The + 12V power source, the + 5V power source, and the backup power source are supplied to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. In addition, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each of the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage is less than 22V, determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred, The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

  It should be noted that the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the output voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the process at the time of power failure even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erasing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erasing switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 323 being pressed down (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. It

  The display control device 45 executes variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 according to the instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It has and. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is executed. Thereby, the display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a design displayed on the decorative design display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 to display it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs the lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win / loss random number counter C1 as a win / loss random number generation means used for win / no win lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery). A decision counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to decide whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative pattern display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the win / fail random number counter C1, and a first Also, the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the second start winning device 33b, which are used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42), etc. Ordinary symbol random number counter C4 used in the entry support lottery to determine whether or not to use. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery of reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the fluctuation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative pattern display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time of the decorative pattern display device 42, that is, the effect pattern is determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, it returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

  In the RAM 503, a special fluctuation holding area as holding storage means for storing the respective values of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the fluctuation selecting counter C3, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 are normally stored. A variable reserve area is provided. The normal variable holding area includes four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting the configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  In addition, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area including four reservation areas (holding first to reservation fourth areas), a second special fluctuation storage area, and one execution area. There is. In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored in series. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the respective values of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored in series. By adopting this configuration, the variable displays (first variable display and second variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held up to four times, respectively.

  Explaining each counter in detail, the success / failure random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 695, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 695) as the final value, it is the lower limit value 0 as the opening value. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the win / fail random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win / random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 695), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of the normal process. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated regularly (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode) is two, and the value is “7,307”, and the high probability. In the state (probability change mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 16 and 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two win / loss determination tables as win value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first hit / miss determination table that stores "7, 307" as a jackpot value and a second hit / miss determination table that stores "8 to 16, 308 to 316" as a jackpot value.

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in the present example, the first starting winning device 33a and No matter which of the second start prize winning devices 33b hits the jackpot, the jackpot classification is the same, so there is one classification determination table). Then, when the jackpot is won in the win / no win lottery, the type of the jackpot state that is given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (the type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to the lower limit value 0. In the present embodiment, the variation selection counter C3 causes a reach state with respect to a decorative symbol, and then a final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and a reach state similarly occurs. After that, the final stop symbol is determined to be stopped except before and after the reach symbol, "reach other than out of front and rear" and "complete detachment" in which the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, there is one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type for the ROM 502, but for example, for the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired upon the entry of a ball, the first reach determination table that is referred to when determining the reach type (in the case of no big hit), and the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b A second reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach type (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired upon the entry of the ball may be provided.

  The variation selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning configuration device 33a or the second startup winning configuration device 33b. .

  Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then the lower limit value. The variation type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, and the other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 37, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 37), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. A finer pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until the (in this example, middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only with the first variation type counter CS1 or to determine the symbol variation aspect by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the decoration pattern display device 42 when the fluctuation of the decoration pattern is started.

  The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4, for example, is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 232 by 1, and is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 which is the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 232). The random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupts in the present embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random numbers that can be won in the ball state is 31, and the range is “1 to 31.” On the other hand, the number of random numbers that is won in the high ball state is 232. The range is “1 to 232.” That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has the low-entering-time support determination table referred to in the entering-in support lottery in the low-entering state and the high-entering state. Entry support in A high-judgment-time support determination table that is referred to in the selection is prepared, and when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time. After that, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened in a pattern according to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and here, for convenience of description, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 are read, the state of the switches is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, when there is no detection information, the process directly proceeds to the next process.

  In addition, when there is the detection information of the various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. In an external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out. ). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  Further, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values have reached the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

  Then, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process associated with passing the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. In a succeeding step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing a process such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 is performed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once ended.

  Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the RAM 503, a first holding counter Na that counts the number of first variable display holdings triggered by winning the first starting winning device 33a, and a second holding trigger Na that wins the second starting winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb for counting the number of variable displays held is provided. It should be noted that it is possible to provide a pending total counter that counts the total number of pending variable displays (the total of the pending number of the first variable display and the pending number of the second variable display).

  In addition, in the execution area and each of the holding areas of the special variation holding area, a winning / discarding random number storage area that stores the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, a winning type random number storing area that stores the value of the type determining counter C2, and a fluctuation selecting counter C3 are provided. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

  Further, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, whether the first variation display based on the ball entered into the first starting prize device 33a or the second variation display based on the ball entering into the second starting prize device 33b. A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating whether or not is stored. Hereinafter, "the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and "the second variation display is displayed in the variation storage area". “The information indicating“ is stored ”is also referred to as“ the second variation flag is set to ON ”.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize-winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start prize-winning switch 224b. When a positive determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). When a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S502, the operation proceeds to step S503, where the second holding counter Nb is incremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S504, addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right second holding lamps are off, the left second holding lamp is turned on, the left second holding lamp is on, and the right second holding lamp is off. If it is, both the left and right second holding lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right second holding lamps are turned on, the left second holding lamp is kept on with the right second holding lamp turned on. When the second holding lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the second holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, the processing for blinking both the left and right second holding lamps is performed.

  After step S504, in step S505, the values of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 (the winning / disallowing random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation). Each value stored in the selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (winning random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the free holding areas of the second special variation holding area. . After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a win / loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. The details of the hit / miss determination processing will be described later.

  In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the following step S508, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 does not correspond to the jackpot, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the hit / miss determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is equal to one of the values “7” and “307” stored in the first winning / discarding determination table. Determine whether. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

  Note that, in FIG. 14, the process of step S 5101 is simplified for convenience of description, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for acceptance / rejection random number C1 is "307". If either of these determinations is affirmative, affirmative determination is made in step S5101, which determination is which? Also in case of negative determination, the negative determination is made in step S 5101.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S5101, the first win / defeat flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5101, the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second win / loss judgment table “8 to 16”. , 308 to 316 ”. By the way, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are a big hit only in the high probability state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode). Even in the determination process, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 and the respective values corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S5103, then in step S5104 the second winning / disabling flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the high probability state is also “displaced”, in step S5105, whether the new variation information is stored in the first special variation suspension area (( Whether or not it corresponds to the first variable display) is determined. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5105, the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area in step S5106 is the value stored in the small hitting determination table "404, 405". It is determined whether or not

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S5106, the small hit flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this processing ends. If a negative decision is made in step S5106, this processing is terminated as it is. If a negative decision is made in step S5105, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, in the winning / winning lottery performed based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting winning device 33b, there is no possibility of winning the small hit.

  Next, the second type determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second win / loss flag has been set to ON in the win / loss determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (a big hit state may occur), in step S5302, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is displayed. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value “0 to 11” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5302, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5303, and then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5302, then the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5304, and the present process is terminated.

  Next, the reach determination process of step S508 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first win / loss flag has been set in the win / loss determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot is a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the big hit state is always generated), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, when the jackpot state does not occur (there is a possibility of being out) at least in the low-probability state, in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration and a new one is newly added. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "out-of-position reach". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5402, then in step S5403, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear deviation is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5402, in step S5404, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to “reach other than front / back deviation”. It is determined whether or not any of the values “2 to 21” to be performed matches. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5404, the flags other than before and after are turned on in step S5405, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variable display ends without the reach state, that is, "completely disengaged", the present process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 subsequent to step S508, the advance command setting process is performed. In addition, in the advance command, the variable information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the variable display) that has been held and stored is triggered by which of the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b. Information indicating the result of the win / loss determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is included together with the information indicating that the output is to be output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). .

  After the processing of step S509, or if the determination in step S501 or step S502 is negative, it is determined in step S510 whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning a prize device 33, the first starting prize switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. When a negative determination is made in step S510, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, in step S511, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is an upper limit value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). When a negative determination is made in step S511, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S511, the operation proceeds to step S512, and the first holding counter Na is incremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S513, addition display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right first holding lamps are off, the left first holding lamp is turned on, the left first holding lamp is on and the right first holding lamp is off. If it is, both the left and right first holding lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right first holding lamps are turned on, the left first holding lamp is turned on while the right first holding lamp is turned on. When the first holding lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the first holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, the processing for blinking both the left and right first holding lamps is performed.

  After step S513, in step S514, the respective values of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the fluctuation selecting counter C3 are stored in the vacant holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area (the winning / failing random number storage area, the winning type random number storage). Area, reach random number storage area). After step S514, the process proceeds to step S515.

  In step S515, a win / loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the hit / miss determination processing have already been described above.

  In the following step S516, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A first type determination process for determining the type is performed.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second win / loss flag is set to ON in the win / loss determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a big hit state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is displayed. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value “0-9” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value “10” corresponding to “2RS”. , 11 ”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5204, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this processing ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and then the present process is terminated.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, when it is determined in step S515 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. The details of the reach determination processing (see FIG. 17) have already been described above.

  After step S517, the advance command setting process is performed in step S518, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33b, the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 and the like are directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the win / loss determination process. The configuration determination process and the reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a provisional storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the acceptance / rejection random number counter C1 and the like are provided is provided, and regarding the information stored in the provisional storage area, the acceptance / rejection determination processing, type A configuration may be adopted in which after the determination processing and the reach determination processing are executed, they are stored in the holding area of the corresponding special variation holding area.

  The process of extracting the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes a discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S514 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Furthermore, the function of extracting and storing the value of the random number counter C1 constitutes the information acquisition means. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S515 (steps S5101, S5103, S5105, and S5107) is a value corresponding to the winning constitutes the first winning / discarding process. Then, the processing of step S5102, step S5104, step S5106, and step S5108 of storing the determination result (setting the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

  Next, the through-gate passage processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. When a negative determination is made in step S601, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal suspension counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S602, that is, it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal hold counter is set. Increment Nc by 1.

  Further, in the subsequent step S604, addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) corresponding to the fact that the number of variable displays held in the normal symbol display device 41 is increased by one is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are in the off state, the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on, the left side ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on, and the right side ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned off. If it is, both the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are turned on, and if both the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are turned on, the left side ordinary hold lamp 406 is kept on with the right side ordinary hold lamp 406 being turned on. When the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is in the blinking state and the right ordinary hold lamp 406 is in the lit state, processing for blinking both the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 is performed.

  After step S504, in step S605, a random number relating to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, the power cut occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power cut occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and due to the NMI interrupt, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set a predetermined value to the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable, for example, 1 Wait processing is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  After that, the data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply / launch control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). In order to do so, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in a succeeding step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. That is, the effectiveness of backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is possible to judge the validity of the backup by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is necessary that the information on occurrence of power failure is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal. Then, the process at power recovery (process at power recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the game state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the starting winning device 33 updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is output to the sub side. It executes external output processing such as transmission to each control device.

  For example, when the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in a variable manner, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the pattern command, etc., determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on these various commands, and the variation mode The display control device 45 is instructed to display (variable display) on the decorative pattern display device 42.

  The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative design such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these fluctuation pattern commands and the fluctuation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the sound, and the like.

  Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described.

  The “normal reach” is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is displayed other than the variation of the decorative pattern. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shortened compared to the normal mode even in the case of various types of reach. For example, the variable display time for deriving the normal reach is “11 seconds” or “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, and “8 seconds” or “12 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. It has become.

  "Super reach" is a reach that makes the player feel a sense of expectation by displaying a character or the like on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established). It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. In this embodiment, the variable display time is “18 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, or “21 seconds”, and is “15 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, or “18 seconds”. Has become. In the normal mode and the latent probability mode, the reach state occurs 7.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the timing for developing the super reach effect is 11 seconds after the start of fluctuation. In the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode, the reach state occurs 4.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the timing for developing the super reach effect is 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

  "Premium reach" is a performance mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), other than the decorative pattern, a character with a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed in such a manner that the player has a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, the variable display time is longer than that of the super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when "2RS" or "small hit" is won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of chance symbols, but when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, a peculiar variation display (chance variation) is displayed. As an example of chance change, after a reach state occurs, if the reach is out of front and back or out of reach other than before and after, the change is continued even after the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Along with the effect, a variable display is finally performed in which "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the player may win the “2RS” and the “small hit” only when the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning device 33a is won. As for the above, only the normal mode and the latent probability mode are performed. Also, the variable display time when "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed is "18 seconds", and the effect that "3", "4", and "1" may be stopped and displayed (up In the lower symbol display area, "3" and "1" are stopped and displayed), but the variable display time that is out is "15 seconds". In the present embodiment, as a chance change, a pattern in which "3" and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper and lower symbol display areas, and then "4" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, and After "3" and "1" are stopped and displayed in the lower symbol display area, patterns other than "4" are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, and after a reach state occurs, in normal reach in the middle symbol display area If there is, the symbol is not stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed, and finally "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (long fluctuation) ) And exist.

  In addition, the fluctuation display time which is "completely disengaged" without any reach state is set to "8 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, and "5 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the lapse of the variable time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, and is a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of chance symbols, a combination of front / rear symbols, and a symbol other than front / rear symbols. It is intended to specify six categories of combination and combination of completely out-of-design. On the other hand, the sub controller 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

  If you win the probability variation jackpot (“15RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation jackpot with coins”) that you can expect an increase in game balls, or if you win the regular jackpot (“15RN”. , "It is also referred to as a normal jackpot with a payout"), the decorative design with a number design is stopped and displayed on the decorative design display device 42 in a combination of double stitches. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probability variation jackpot with payout”, a probability variation jackpot pattern that is a combination of decorative symbols composed of odd-numbered ditches of 1, 3, 5, 7, or 2, or 2 , 4, 6, or 8, the variable display is stopped and displayed in either combination of the normal jackpot pattern, which is a combination of the decorative patterns consisting of even-numbered doublet patterns, and in the case of "normal jackpot with coins" , Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by a combination of jackpot patterns.

  When the sub-control device 262 receives a symbol command of a probability variation jackpot with a payout, it determines one of the combinations of the symbols composed of any one of the 1 to 9 as a stop symbol, and the payout. When there is a normal big hit symbol command, one of the combinations of symbols consisting of 2, 4, 6, 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  In addition, when winning the probability variation jackpot (“2RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation probability jackpot without payout”) in which an increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected, the decoration symbol display device 42 displays “3” / “from the top”. The combination of the chance symbols of "4" and "1" will be stopped and displayed. There is only one combination of chance patterns in this embodiment.

  The combination of the front and rear misalignment symbols corresponds to the "front and rear misalignment reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated. The combination of symbols other than the front / rear deviation corresponds to “reach other than front / rear deviation” in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated. The combination of complete detachment patterns corresponds to "complete detachment" in which even reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a combination of front and rear deviating symbols, a combination of symbols other than the front and rear deviating symbols, and a combination of completely deviating symbols, it is “disengaged”.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the sub-control device 262 receives these deviating symbol commands, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In the present embodiment, three commands are prepared for the removal symbol command, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one removal symbol command, and the sub-control device 262 displays the decorative symbol. It may be configured to determine the combination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In a succeeding step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Then, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, and determination of a big hit and setting of variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control processing will be described later.

  In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S208, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. The details of this starting winning device control processing will be described later.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes of step S201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeatedly executed (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success / failure random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly changes. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Further, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power supply has been cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S213 is performed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. Be seen. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember.

  Then, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, in step S217, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  The processing of step S209 is the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processing of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than in the case where each processing is in the middle. And can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval period set after the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is the fluctuation interval period, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then this processing ends. That is, for example, when the variation interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the variation interval timer is set to “249 (“ 250 ”in the case where the step S802 is performed before step S801”) is set. In the process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec and becomes "0" after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not the fluctuation interval period, in step S803, a hit state storage area described later in detail is referred to, and at present, a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. Or not.

  Incidentally, during the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, A round display period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43a and 43b can be started.

  During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, A round display period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43a and 43b can be started.

  In the hit situation storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in the states other than the big hit state and the small hit state, and in the big hit state and the small hit state, "1" is stored in the opening period and the interval period. , "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in the big hit state or the small hit state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the big hit state or the small hit state is in progress, the present process is terminated, while if an affirmative decision is made in step S803, details will be described later in step S804. By checking the setting status of the special figure displaying flag, the first or second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) determines whether or not it is being variably displayed. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which is a state in which the variable display is stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is started, and the flag of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state is not being performed and the variable display is not being performed either, the process proceeds to step S805, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. In the display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed (for example, only the first and second special figure lamps or the second special figure lamps from the right in the bottom row are lit. Standby display setting for deriving a mode). That is, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment, after the fluctuation stop, the stop mode is maintained during the fluctuation interval period (in a mode showing the result of the winning / winning lottery). However, when the variation interval period ends, the display mode is changed to indicate that the variation standby state is set.

  After step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning device 33b is larger than "0". Determine whether.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, that is, if any one of the second variable displays is stored in suspension, in step S807, 1 is subtracted from the second suspension counter Nb. In the present embodiment, if the second variable display is stored in the hold by the determination processing in step S806, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is held and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is preferentially consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

  In the following step S808, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special variation suspension area is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S808, in step S809, the second variation flag of the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON. In a succeeding step S810, subtraction display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the number of hold of the second variable display being decreased by one is performed. In other words, when the pair of left and right second holding lamps are both blinking, the second holding lamp on the right is turned on while the second holding lamp on the left is blinking, and the second holding lamp on the left is blinking. When the second holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, both left and right second holding lamps are turned on, and when the second holding lamp on both the left and right sides is lighting state, the second holding lamp on the left side When the second holding lamp on the right side is turned off while the is on, and the second holding lamp on the left side is on and the second holding lamp on the right side is off, both left and right second holding lamps are turned off. Perform processing to cause it.

  After step S810, in step S811, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S806, that is, when no second variation display is retained and stored, in step S812, the first variation triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na, which counts the number of held displays, is greater than zero.

  When a negative determination is made in step S812, this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S812, 1 is subtracted from the first suspension counter Na in step S813. In a succeeding step S814, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S814, in step S815, the first variation flag of the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. In a succeeding step S816, subtraction display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the number of hold of the first variable display being decreased by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first holding lamps are both blinking, the left first holding lamp is turned on while the left first holding lamp is blinking, and the left first holding lamp is blinking. When the first holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, both the first holding lamps on the left and right are turned on, and when the first holding lamps on the left and right are both turned on, the first holding lamp on the left side When the 1st hold lamp on the right side is turned off while the is on, and the 1st hold lamp on the left side is on and the 1st hold lamp on the right side is off, both the 1st hold lamps are turned off Perform processing to cause it.

  After step S816, a variable display setting process is performed in step S811, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variation suspension area is one, and the data stored in the first special variation suspension area and the second special variation suspension area are displayed when performing the variation display based on the data. Then, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process of step S811 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area described later in detail is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the high probability state (probability variation mode or latent probability mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any value of “11”, “12”, “21”, and “22” is stored in the mode storage area, and “11” corresponds to the normal mode and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is the high probability state by determining whether or not “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, that is, if it is a high-probability state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), then in step S902, the win / fail random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation suspension area is taken into consideration, and It is determined whether or not either the 1st or the 2nd hit / miss flag (see the hit / miss judgment processing of FIG. 14) is set to ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win / loss lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If the determination in step S901 is negative, that is, if it is in the low probability state (normal mode or time reduction mode), in step S903, the random number storage area for winning / damaging is taken into consideration, and whether the first winning / damaging flag is ON. Determine whether or not. If the affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win / loss lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the winning / discarding random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot determination flag.

  In a succeeding step S905, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see the type determination processing in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S905, that is, if it is "15RS", then 15RS pattern setting processing is carried out in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variable display for teaching the occurrence of “15RS”, and based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, Variation patterns of the display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display time, stop mode of variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42, effect pattern of variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ) Is determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S919 described below.

  Further, when the determination in step S905 is negative, in step S907, it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON by taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S907, that is, if it is "2RS", a 2RS pattern setting process is carried out in step S908. After step S908, the process proceeds to step S919.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S907, a 15RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S919.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S911, the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and the small hit flag is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is. When a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, in step S912, the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and the front-back flag (see the reach determination processing in FIG. 17) is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the "rear-rear reach" has been performed, the front-rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

  Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S912, in step S914, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S914, that is, if the "reach other than out-of-front / back-off" has been performed, a reach pattern setting process other than before / after is performed in step S915, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S914, that is, in the case of "complete deviation", after performing deviation pattern setting processing in step S916, the process proceeds to step S919.

  Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state is confirmed is set in step S917. . After that, in step S918, the small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the low-probability state, in step S910, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and the second winning / non-winning result It is determined whether the flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S910, the front-rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S919. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S919, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to ON. This indicates that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b is satisfied. In a succeeding step S920, a special figure display timer setting process for measuring a fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display.

  The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer as described above, in the next external output process of the normal process, when the control signal for starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b. The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the sub-control device 262 which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the special display device. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43a, 43b, the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After step S920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of obtaining the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 and storing it in the special variation holding area, the determination process of steps S506 and 513, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / non-winning lottery is configured by the winning / non-winning flag and the small hit flag, and the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining the winning / non-winning based on the situation at that time. Further, the second winning / disabling determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S913, step S915, step S916, and step S918. It

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S817 and the subtraction process of the special figure display timer is performed. Each time this processing is performed once, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set to the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction into consideration. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", the affirmative determination is made in step S818.

  When a negative determination is made in step S818, in step S824, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. In addition, based on the setting content of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S824, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and in step S820 stop display setting is carried out for performing stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, in the next external output process in the normal process, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b. That is, on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the modes corresponding to the respective jackpot types, deviations, and the like set in the variable display setting process are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the subordinate control device 262 to perform stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. This ensures that the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are synchronized. However, since the sub-control device 262 has already determined the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 by the symbol command or the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information about the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again. Need not be added. Further, again, the main display is the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 is merely an auxiliary (for production).

  Succeedingly, in a step S822, discrimination information setting processing for performing initial setting of a hit state and switching setting of a game mode is performed, and in step S823, the variable interval timer corresponds to a variable interval period (for example, 1 second). After the value to be set is set, this process ends.

  Here, the discrimination information setting process of step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, by referring to the execution area of the special variation holding area, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, in step S1002, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1002, that is, when the jackpot is "15RS" or "15RN", the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is determined in step S1003. "15" is set to the round number counter for discrimination.

  In the following step S1004, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set to the special variable timer used for the control during the winning state (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32). Succeedingly, in a step S1006, "8" indicating eight, which is the maximum number of entered balls per round, is set to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. . It should be noted that the value of the prize winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 in the variable interruption device 32 during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) to determine whether or not there is a ball. If it is determined that there has been a ball entry, 1 is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1007, an opening command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the number of all rounds in the hit state. After step S1007, this process ends.

  It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, the appearance of promotion of the jackpot type in appearance, etc. (for example, when an even-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, it is taught that “15RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after. Or, when an odd-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the fact that “15RS” has been won in the immediate jackpot state is taught) may be performed.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1002, "2" is set in the round number counter in step S1008. After step S1008, in step S1009, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1010, a value "500" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set in the special variable timer, a winning counter is set in a value "8" in step S1011, and an opening is performed in step S1012. Set the command. After that, this processing ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1013 whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1013, the operation moves to step S1008 described above. That is, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed in the same manner as when a big win of "2RS" is won.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1013, then in step S1014, it is decided whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the mode is the time reduction mode. When a negative determination is made in step S1014, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1014, then in step S1015 the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, at the end of the “15RN” jackpot state, the number of fluctuation displays corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode (for example, 100 times) is set to the fluctuation counter, and the special display is performed. Every time variable display of the devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1015.

  In a succeeding step S1016, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1016, that is, in the end degree of the winning state, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is not yet displayed. If not, the process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1016, then in step S1017, "11" indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed the specified number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1017, in step S1018, a support end command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then this process is ended.

  Next, the variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not it is a state other than the big hit state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, then this processing ends. By the way, at the start of the big hit state, "1" is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the jackpot is in the jackpot state (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit state storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. By the way, at the start of the big hit state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the determination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S1203, it is decided in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1204, then in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1206, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout. Here, it is determined whether or not the payout is a big hit "15RS" or "15RN" (whether it is other than "2RS").

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1206, a value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set to the special variable timer in step S1208. To do.

  After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, processing for opening the variable winning a prize device 32 is performed, and in step S1210, a round command for transmitting information to start the round to the sub-control device 262. Set. After that, this processing ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described later in detail, when all the rounds in the jackpot state are finished and the ending period is started, “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1212.

  In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Then, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1215, then in step S1216 the value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1215, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1217.

  After step S1216 or step S1217, in step S1218, the winning counter is set to "8". Further, in step S1219, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1220, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect that the interval is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this processing ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, when the time (open time or closed time) for which the open state or the closed state of the variable winning device 32 remains (open time or closed time), the process proceeds to step S1221. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls to the winning device 32 is "0". It should be noted that the winning counter is set to "8" which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1221, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1221 is affirmative, that is, if the opportunity to end the round arrives without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round ends promptly at that point even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  If the affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if all the rounds in the jackpot state have been exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1222, and “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not there is a payout and a big hit. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1223, the value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1224. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S1223, the value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set to the special variable timer in step S1225.

  After step S1224 or step S1225, in step S1226, the winning counter is set to "7". When the process of setting the ending of step S1222 or later is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is "0". Then, if the value of the winning counter is left at "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1221 in the variable winning device control processing after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. For this reason, in step S1226, a temporary numerical value (“7” in this example) other than “0” is entered in the winning counter to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1226, in step S1227, the process of closing the variable winning a prize device 32 is performed, and in the following step S1228, an ending command for transmitting information to start the ending to the sub control device 262 is set. After that, this processing ends.

  If the determination in step S1211 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process moves to step S1229 and end setting processing is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area and the variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the execution area of the special variation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the 15RN flag is set to ON.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1401, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is added after the jackpot state is completed.

  In the following step S1403, "100" is set to the variation counter. It should be noted that the variation counter is capable of displaying the variation of the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for understanding that. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time saving start command for informing the sub control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode (transition to the pullback stage) is set. After that, this processing ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. When a positive determination is made in step S1405, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1406. As a result, the probability variation mode is added after the jackpot state ends. After step S1406, in step S1407, the probability variation start command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the start of the probability variation mode (transition to the probability variation stage) is set. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1408, then in step S1409 the value "22" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the latent probability mode is added after the jackpot state ends. After step S1409, in step S1410, a precursor stage start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the transition to the precursor stage is set. After that, this processing ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1408, that is, when the small hit in which the game mode is not changed is won, the process proceeds to step S1410, the precursor stage start command is set, and then the present process ends. To do. Incidentally, the precursory stage is a stage showing that the player has moved to the case of winning the “2RS” big hit or the small hit and staying in either the normal mode or the latent probability mode.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1229, in step S1230, “0” indicating that the jackpot state is not in the jackpot state is set. After that, in step S1231, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262, which notifies the sub-control device 262 of the information that the jackpot state is to be ended, and then the present process is ended. The hit end command includes the number-of-times information of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the universal figure interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the regular figure interval period set after the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the period is the universal figure interval period, the value of the universal figure interval timer is subtracted in step S2102, and then this process is ended. That is, for example, the universal figure interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec), and the universal figure interval timer is set to "249 (" 250 "when step S2102 is performed before step S2101)". In this case, in the process, the value of the universal figure interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec and becomes "0" after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is not the ordinary figure interval period, then in step S2103, the ordinary figure display flag indicating whether or not the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performing variable display. It is determined whether or not it is on. In addition, when the general figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the variable.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2103, the flow proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary suspension counter Nc is greater than 0. At this time, if the value of the ordinary holding counter Nc is 0, this processing is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, this process is ended. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, in the normal symbol display device 41, the standby display setting for deriving the display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed is performed. May be That is, the normal symbol display device 41, after the fluctuation stop, the stop mode will be maintained (in a mode showing the result of the ball entry support lottery) during the normal time interval, but the normal time interval period ends. Then, it may be configured to switch to a display mode indicating that it is in the variable standby state.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2104, then 1 is subtracted from the normal suspension counter Nc in step S2105.

  In a succeeding step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normal variable holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area.

  Then, in step S2107, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set, and the universal symbol fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

  Here, the universal figure variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In a succeeding step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the present is a state other than the big hit state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3202, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, then in step S2303 it is determined whether or not a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, a high value. It is determined whether or not it is in a ball entering state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  When a positive determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to the ordinary symbol display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the ordinary symbol display device 41. Set "465" to make it 1.86 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "0". In the high-ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 232", it is won.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, when the winning support lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b is won, the winning support lottery is won in step S2306. The entry support flag indicating that is set to ON. After step S2306, this process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, when the jackpot state or the low ball entry state, in step S2307, the variable display time of the normal symbol to the universal symbol display timer "465" is set to set the value to 1.86 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1 to 31". In the low ball entry state, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 31".

  When a negative determination is made in step S2308, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in the above step S2306, after the turning-on support flag indicating that the winning support lottery is won is set to ON, The process ends. In addition, the variation display time of the ordinary symbol, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, etc. can be set appropriately for each model of the pachinko machine, for example, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the high entry state. Alternatively, the winning probability may be higher than the winning probability of the entry support lottery in the low entry state.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display of the ordinary hold display device 44 (ordinary hold lamp 406) corresponding to the fact that the number of held variable displays of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is decreased by one. Perform processing. That is, when both the pair of left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are in the blinking state, the left side ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on while the left side ordinary holding lamp 406 is kept blinking and the left side ordinary holding lamp 406 is in the blinking state. When the right ordinary holding lamp 406 is in the lighting state, both the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned on, and when the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are in the lighting state, the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is When the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side is turned off while the light is turned on, and the normal hold lamp 406 on the left side is turned on and the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side is turned off, both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned off. Perform processing to cause it. After step S2108, this process ends.

  Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2109, and processing for subtracting the universal figure display timer is performed. Every time this processing is performed once, the count value of the universal figure display timer is decremented by 1.

  Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the universal figure display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the general figure displaying flag is turned off in step S2111, and the general figure stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, in the case of winning (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), both the pair of left and right universal figure lamps 405 are turned on, and when they are out, only the left side universal figure lamp 405 is turned on. Let

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2113, and the universal figure discrimination information setting process is performed. Here, the universal figure determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set ON. When a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state is set to on in step S2402.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is in the high-ball entering state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "450" to be 8 seconds.

  Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number) of opening the second starting winning device 33b so that the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409. Further, in step S2410, the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2411, a support period start command for informing the sub-control device 262 that it is a period in which the second starting winning device 33b is opened is set. Further, in step S2412, a blade opening command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the timing for opening the second start winning device 33b has arrived is set. After that, this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 1.0 second with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "250". In a succeeding step S2407, the opening number counter is set to "1" so that the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409, and the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed in step S2410. In step S2412, the blade opening command is set, and then the present process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to the universal figure interval period (for example, 1 second) is set in the universal figure interval timer, and then the present process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, the switching display for continuously performing the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (the switching display for alternately lighting the pair of left and right universal symbol lamps 405). Make settings. Incidentally, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display will be performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Further, in step S2116, it is determined whether or not the value of the universal figure display timer is "175" corresponding to 0.7 seconds. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2116, then in step S2117, a notification timing command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to notify that the timing for performing "open notice notification", which will be described in detail later, has arrived, The process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2116, it is determined in step S2118 whether or not the value of the universal figure display timer is "50" corresponding to 0.2 seconds. When a negative determination is made in step S2118, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2118, an opening confirmation command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that it has been decided to open the second starting winning device 33b. After step S2119, this process ends.

  Next, the starting prize winning apparatus control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag during the support period is on. When a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2201, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202.

  In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period in which the opened / closed state of the second start prize winning apparatus 33b is maintained, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2203, then it is decided in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2204, that is, if the second starting prize winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing to close it has arrived, the process moves to step S2205, and the sub-control device 262 is instructed. Then, a blade closing command is set to notify that the timing for closing the second starting winning device 33b has come. Then, in step S2206, the normal variable flag is turned off. In a succeeding step S2207, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in a step S2208, the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to the closed state.

  Then, in step S2209, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening counter is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S2209, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2210. Further, in step S2211, a support period end command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the period for opening the second starting winning device 33b has ended is set. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning ball support lottery that has been won is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based on that. If there is the remaining number, the value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "250") is set to the ordinary variable timer in step S2212. After step S2212, this process ends.

  In addition, when the determination in step S2204 is negative, that is, in the interval period during which the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the timing for ending the interval period. When the time comes, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2213, and the value corresponding to the opening time for the normal variable timer is calculated in step S2214 (in this example, when the ball is in a high-ball entering state; “450”, low ball-in). In the state, "250") is set, and in step S2215, the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed. Then, in step S2216, the blade opening command is set, and then the present process is terminated.

  When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, if the specified number of game balls (for example, one) has entered the second starting winning device 33b, the second starting winning device 33b. May be immediately closed (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start prize switch 224b is detected, and an affirmative determination is made). In this case, the process may move to step S2205.)

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of description, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is once put on standby, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, in order to store that the command is transmitted from the main control device 261. The command reception flag is turned on, and this reception interrupt processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in the predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Will be updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is assumed to be the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on and the command determination process may be performed if no command is received. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received by confirming the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at every predetermined interval.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value and the interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value or the like) is normal in step S3108, the process at power recovery (when power failure is restored) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, in step S3110 the power-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interruption is permitted.

  After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in step S3122 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, and therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. In the power outage process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 513 that are backed up.

  In the process of step S3122, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is low and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the command determination process is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  In the processing of steps S3304 to S3306, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is the payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command and then performs the initialization process of the RAM 513. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 are initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the deviation of the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the harmful effects of. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 has been initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout permission of the prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination processing is ended without performing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization processing of the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, the payout initialization command is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, if the prize balls are not paid out Although a bad effect is caused to cause a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before power-off, In order to permit the payout of the prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, since the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the prize ball number corresponding to the command to the total prize ball number stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the prize balls can be paid out early for the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, since the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO) nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart in FIG. Upon completion of the command determination process, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit is received from the CR unit connection board 314. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3202, then in step S3203 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is sent to the condition transmission circuit 564 of the firing control circuit 312 of the firing / power supply control device 310. Send.

  After step S3203 or if a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination processing. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, then the state return operation is executed. By this processing, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state). .

  After that, in step S3206, setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set, and when the lower plate is no longer full, Execute the setting of the plate full release status. In addition, in step S3207, the tank sphere-free state (ball-out state) or the tank sphere-free state (ball-present state) is set according to the change in the state of the tank sphere. In other words, the tank sphere no switch detection signal is used to determine the tank sphere no state, the tank sphere no special feature is set, the tank sphere no state is set, and the tank sphere no longer special feature is set. Execute the setting.

  After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the state is notified.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and lent balls is executed. More specifically, the payout amount setting process is performed in step S3209, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

  In step S3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to perform the ball removal process by driving the payout motor on condition that the ball removal operation is not disabled and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3213, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a blocked state. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

  Next, a normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and if the commands are stored in all storage areas, they are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a reservation information storage process of storing the advance command information output from the main control device 261 in the reservation information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. In the starting command, as described above, information indicating which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variation display triggered by the winning, the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. It includes information indicating whether there is any, information indicating the type of jackpot, and information indicating the type of reach.

  The holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262 is, like the special variable holding area of the main control device 261, a first holding information storage area and a second holding information storage area each having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). It has a pending information storage area and one execution area. In the first pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot type, and a jackpot. Information regarding whether or not information is displayed and information regarding variation display such as reach type (variation information) are stored in time series. Further, in the second suspension information storage area, the variation information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the second variation display (information stored in the second special variation suspension area). By adopting the configuration, the variation information about the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to store four pieces of variation information regarding each of them. As a result, not only the execution areas of the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261, but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262. .

  Here, the pending information storage processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the advance command is received (whether or not the advance command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative decision is made in step S4101, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4101, does the starting command correspond to the entry into the second starting prize device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) in step S4102? Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the advance command corresponds to a ball input (change information stored in the first special change hold area) of the first start winning device 33a, in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd, which counts the number of held variable information items held in the first held information storage area, is incremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S4104, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the information on the jackpot type, the information on whether or not the jackpot is reached, the information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the free holding area of the first holding information storage area. Store in the first area.

  Further, in subsequent step S4105, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where intentional display of effect displays related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays is performed (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to give the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first reservation information storage. Of the areas, the variation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 49, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 9, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The notice type counter is periodically updated, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (preceding type counter buffer) each time.

  Then, in the notice information storing process, when the variable information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notification flag which is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notification is derived.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give consecutive notices, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the form of consecutive notices. A plurality of advance notification success / failure determination tables and advance notification tables are provided, and the advance notification success / failure determination table and the advance notification table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, continuous notice lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106, when the value of the first fluctuation holding counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first holding information storage area, Decide whether or not to execute continuous notice by referring to the notice win / failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, and game mode (the one that corresponds to the jackpot is easier to win than the one that corresponds to the miss) . Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first holding information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode. Refer to to determine whether to execute continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the hold display area 462 provided at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 42, a hold icon 461 simulating a "buoy ring" is displayed. The hold display area 462 of the present embodiment is an execution corresponding area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area and a hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold areas of the hold information storage areas (first and second hold information storage areas). 462b is provided, and a maximum of nine hold icons 461 can be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the first variable display and the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second variable display are in a common mode, and if the hold icon 461 is visually recognized, the first icon is displayed. It is impossible to identify which of the hold icon 461 corresponding to the variable display or the second variable display.

  In addition, the hold icon 461 may be derived in a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the corresponding variable display. Hereinafter, the hold icon 461 in this aspect is also referred to as a “prefetch hold icon 463”. The look-ahead hold icon 463 of the present embodiment is derived in a mode in which the character uses the “buoy” (see FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c)). Further, a plurality of types of characters of the look-ahead hold icon 463 are prepared, and the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is associated with the winning expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) for occurrence of the jackpot state. As a result, the look-ahead hold icon 463 is ranked according to the aspect thereof with respect to the jackpot expectation degree, and by deriving the look-ahead hold icon 463, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested (a look-ahead hold notice effect is performed). It is configured.

  Further, when the prefetching pending icon 463 is derived, the pattern of the prefetching pending icon 463 changes until the variable display corresponding to the prefetching pending icon 463 is exhausted (the pending change effect is derived. In some cases.

  That is, in the hold icon setting process of step S4107, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived, and in the case of no win, the pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined to be the default (only the float). To be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not the holding change effect is to be performed. In the case of winning, the holding change flag of the corresponding holding area is set to ON and the pattern of the prefetch holding icon 463 is set. An upper limit pattern that may be finally displayed and a provisional pattern that is first displayed and has a lower jackpot expectation degree (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern are determined. On the other hand, in the case of no win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the prefetching hold icon 463.

  Then, basically, a process of displaying the hold icon 461 of the determined pattern by arranging it on the right side of the rightmost one of the hold icons 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed. Be seen. In the present embodiment, the second variable display is prioritized over the first variable display and is consumed. Therefore, when the second variable display is newly suspended while the first variable display is suspended. In the hold corresponding area 462b, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the newly held second variable display is displayed at the position on the left side of the leftmost hold icon 461 of the hold icons 461 corresponding to the first variable display. It has become so.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in step S4107, when the prefetching pending icon 463 is led to the pending display area 462, the prefetching pending effect flag is set to ON. After step S4107, this process ends.

  In addition, in the case of affirmative determination in step S4102, that is, in the case where the advance command corresponds to the entry into the second starting prize device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of holdings of the fluctuation information held in the second holding information storage area is incremented by one.

  After that, in step S4109, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the information on the jackpot type, the information on whether or not the jackpot is reached, the information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the free holding area of the second holding information storage area. Store in the first area. In a succeeding step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the holding area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in the step S4109 of the second holding information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous announcement is performed. The continuous announcement lottery process of step S4111 only corresponds to the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4106 corresponding to the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted. After step S4111, in step S4112, hold icon setting processing is performed. After step S4112, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3916.

  In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying a decorative design. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the upper / middle / lower portions used for setting the out-of-place symbols in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  When the big hit state occurs, the big hit decoration symbol counter CO determines the pattern (big hit pattern) when the decorative pattern display device 42 stops changing, and in the present embodiment, as the big hit decorative symbol counter CO. , 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 8 and returned to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

  When a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped is received from the main control device 261, for example, the counter value is 0 based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) not shown. If so, "1" (the doublet), if 1, "2" (the doublet), the combination of jackpot symbols is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated by the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub controller 262 receives the symbol command, as described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. You may

  Further, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, "2" (doublet), if 2 to 4, "4" The combination of the jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner that (6 doublets), 5 and 6 are “6” (double eyes), and 7 and 8 are “8” (double eyes).

  Each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, CR determines the combination of each stopped symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the win / win lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a front / rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, a reach symbol buffer other than out of front / rear, and complete. It is stored in any of the out-of-design symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative decision is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative decision is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update timing of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if the update time of the lower symbol counter CR (NO in both steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the updating of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, The calculation result is set as the current value of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

  According to the above CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update processing, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. There is no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

  After that, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same) is determined. If it is determined and it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol in the middle symbol display area are the same). Determine whether. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear deviation symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear deviating symbols (front and rear deviating reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. This is stored in the out-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of symbols other than front and rear (reach other than front and rear) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

  If the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the detachment symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the detachment symbol (completely detached symbol), so in step S4011, the The combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at this time is stored in the complete deviation symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a holding process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the holding process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative decision is made in step S4201, it is decided in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is larger than "0". When a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when the variation information of the second variation display is not stored in a suspended manner, the process proceeds to step S4203 and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by 1.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variable display is preferentially consumed over the first variable display, and when the second variable display is stored on hold, the first variable display is consumed. There is no such thing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is retained and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than “0”, and thus the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It is determined which of the fluctuation information of the above is held. Of course, the variation pattern command is given information as to which variation information of the first variation display and the second variation display, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display has.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first suspension information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first holding information storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area. After step S4204, the process moves to step S4207.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of variation information for the second variation display is stored on hold, the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4205.

  In subsequent step S4206, a process of shifting the data stored in the second suspension information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding information storage area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S4206, the process moves to step S4207. In the present embodiment, the number of execution areas of the hold information storage area is one, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area are displayed in a variable display corresponding to the data. When it is called, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is turned on. Since this is not performed, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what is the type, and if not a jackpot, what is the reach type? , The type of continuous notice is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S4207 that the continuous notice flag is ON, a specific effect flag indicating that a predetermined specific effect is derived from among the effects is turned ON. It is like this.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Each holding area of the holding information storage area and the execution area are provided with a holding icon storage area for storing the type of the holding icon 461. The information regarding the holding icon 461 is also stored in the holding information storage area described above. The data is shifted in the area data shift process.

  The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 according to the data shift, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, every one variable display is consumed (executed), the most. The hold icon 461 located on the left side is erased, and the hold icon 461 located on the right side is shifted to the left (the display place is moved).

  In the present embodiment, in step S4208, if there is a holding area in which the holding change flag is set to ON before the processing of redrawing the holding icon 461, the holding change effect of the prefetch holding icon 463 is displayed. A lottery as to whether or not to perform is performed, and when the prize is won, the pattern of the prefetching pending icon 463 is changed to a higher rank (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding change flag is set to on, the prefetch holding effect flag is turned off. Furthermore, by changing the pattern of the pre-reading pending icon 463, when the pre-reading pending icon 463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the pre-reading pending presentation flag is turned off and the pending change flag is turned off. ing.

  After step S4208, in step S4209, the sub-control device 262 side causes the variation time grasping timer for counting the variation time of the variation display in the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) to be executed. After the variable time count flag is set to ON, this processing ends. The variation time grasping timer is configured to be updated every 2 msec when the variation time count flag is set to ON.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub control device 262 determines the display pattern and the like by referring to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45 is performed.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. It should be noted that once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, the symbols are cooperated with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45. The variable display of is continued.

  In addition, when the variable display is started, if the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON, each situation is determined based on the change information of the change pattern command. The table corresponding to is used to determine the type of continuous notice to be derived in the variable display, to determine the derivation of notice production different from the continuous notice, and to perform display corresponding to the operation of the production button 125 or the like. Or Further, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing an effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

  Here, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4701, then in step S4702 a "15RS" or "15RN" is sent to the round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds, based on the information contained in the opening command. If there is, "15" is set, and if "2RS", then "2" is set.

  After that, in step S4703, if it is a big hit with a payout, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various presentation modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding presentation is performed by referring to the table. You will choose and let it run.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether a round command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if the jackpot with a payout is a jackpot, the production is set during a round of up to 30 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and in the case of a jackpot with a payout, in step S4708, the effect is set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

  If a negative decision is made in step S4706, it is decided in step S4709 whether or not an ending command is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if it is a jackpot with a payout, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this processing is ended.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot without jackpot, each period such as an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period (1 second). Rather than setting the performance separately, it is set to perform the performance (announcement, etc.) throughout the entire period.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If a negative decision is made in step S4712, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4712, then in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated, and setting is made such that it is in the normal gaming state in which variable display is carried out. After that, this processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3908, a variation stop process relating to suspension of variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4401, in step S4402, processing for stopping and displaying the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is carried out.

  After step S4402, the fluctuation time count flag is turned off in step S4403, and the fluctuation time grasping timer is reset in step S4404.

  After step S4404 or if a negative decision is made in step S4401, it is decided in step S4405 whether or not a support end command is received. If a negative decision is made in step S4405, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the case of affirmative determination in step S4405, in step S4406, the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed from the "pullback stage" to the "normal stage". After that, this processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3909, a notification state setting process for notifying in advance that the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is performed. Details of the notification state setting process will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S3910, opening notice notification setting processing for performing setting regarding the notice of opening notice is performed. Details of the opening notice notification setting process will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S3911, a pseudo blade opening control process for controlling the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 provided in the second starting winning device 33b is performed. Details of the pseudo blade opening control process will be described later.

  In the lamp setting process of step S3912, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the voice setting process of step S3913, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when a command relating to voice such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from main control device 261, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3913.

  In step S3914, other processing such as control setting for customer waiting effect is performed. In other words, when the player is not playing for a specified period of time, it is configured to switch to the customer drawing mode or the energy saving mode, and the decorative symbol display device 42 does not display the decorative symbol as a customer waiting effect (instead of , A series of moving images are displayed, or still images are displayed), and a demonstration screen display is displayed such that the screen is darkened.

  In step S3915, an external output process of transmitting a control signal to each device based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to S3915 is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner.

  After the processes of steps S3905 to S3915 performed every 2 msec are executed, or when the negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3916, and it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 261.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3917 to determine whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3916 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3918. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased. After the power-off process is executed, the process loops endlessly.

  Next, the firing transmission process performed by the firing control circuit 312 of the power / firing control device 310 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S6101, the condition transmission circuit 564 of the firing control circuit 312 causes the touch sensor 1451 (see FIG. 50) of the handle 18 to display a touch signal indicating that the player is touching the handle 18 (rotation operation body 1402). Is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6101, the touch signal is transmitted from the condition transmitting circuit 564 to the driving IC 561 via the permission receiving circuit 565 in step S6102. In the present embodiment, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position, the metal plating layer of the rotary operation body 1402 and the touch sensor 1451 are insulated, and the touch signal is not transmitted.

  After step S6102, in step S6103, it is determined whether or not the dial position signal indicating the rotation angle (rotation phase) of the rotary operation body 1402 is received from the variable resistor 1445 of the handle 18. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6103, the dial position signal is transmitted from the condition transmission circuit 564 to the adjustment IC 562 via the permission reception circuit 565 in step S6104.

  After step S6104, or if a negative determination is made in step S6101 or step S6103, in step S6105, the condition transmission circuit 564 causes the stop switch 1455 of the steering wheel 18 to stop the stop lever 18a (press the stop switch 1455). It is determined whether or not the firing switch signal indicating that the operation unit 1456) is not operated is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6105, then in step S6106 a firing switch signal is transmitted from the condition transmission circuit 564 to the drive IC 561 via the permission reception circuit 565. In the present embodiment, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position, the stop lever 18a is displaced to the operating position by the urging force acting on the rotary operation body 1402 (the pressing operation portion 1456 is pressed. Is set), and the firing switch signal is not transmitted.

  After step S6106 or when a negative determination is made in step S6105, in step S6107, the condition transmission circuit 564 receives from the payout control device 311 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is connected. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6107, then a CR unit connection signal is transmitted from the condition transmission circuit 564 to the driving IC 561 via the permission reception circuit 565 in step S6108.

  After step S6108 or when the determination in step S6107 is negative, in step S6109, the condition transmission circuit 564 receives all of the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal. It is determined whether or not there is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6109, then in step S6110, the condition transmission circuit 564 indicates that the condition transmission circuit 564 is receiving all of the touch signal, the firing switch signal and the CR unit connection signal. Is transmitted to main controller 261.

  After step S6110, or if a negative decision is made in step S6109, this processing ends. In the present embodiment, the function of performing step S6109 constitutes the firing condition detection means.

  Next, the emission reception process performed by the driving IC 561 of the power supply / emission control device 310 will be described with reference to FIG. When the permission receiving circuit 565 receives the firing permission signal, the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, and the ball feed signal, the permission receiving circuit 565 transmits the corresponding signals to the driving IC 561. It has become. Further, the permission reception circuit 565 is adapted to transmit a corresponding signal to the adjustment IC 562 when receiving the dial position signal.

  First, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the driving IC 561 (permission receiving circuit 565) receives the firing permission signal from the main control device 261. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6201, whether or not the driving IC 561 (permission receiving circuit 565) is receiving all of the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal in step S6202. Determine whether or not. If a negative decision is made in step S6202, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6202, in step S6203, the launching device 60 (launching solenoid) is driven to perform a launching process for launching a game ball, and then this process ends.

  The adjusting IC 562 controls the launching device 60 for launching strength (firing speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. As a result, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 with the strength adjusted by the adjusting IC 562.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6201, it is determined in step S6203 whether the driving IC 561 (permission receiving circuit 565) receives the ball feeding signal from the main control device 261. If a negative decision is made in step S6204, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination is affirmative, in step S6205, the preparation ball detection for detecting that the game ball is set at the launch position of the launch rail 61 where the launch device 60 will launch the game ball It is determined whether or not the sensor 64 is turned on.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6205, in step S6206, the ball feeding device 63 is driven to perform a ball feeding process for setting the game ball at the launch position, and then the present process is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6205, since the game ball has already been set at the launch position, this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, the firing permission command setting process performed in the timer interrupt process of main controller 261 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag indicating that the firing state signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312 is set to ON. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6301, it is decided in step S6302 whether or not a firing state signal is received. When a negative determination is made in step S6302, the firing permission flag is turned off in step S6303, and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6302, it is decided in step S6304 whether or not the value of the firing timer used for measuring the firing interval of the game ball is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S6304, in step S6305, the main control device 261 transmits a firing permission signal to the permission receiving circuit 565 of the firing control circuit 312. In a succeeding step S6306, the firing permission flag is turned off.

  Further, in step S6307, main controller 261 instructs sub controller 262 that main controller 261 is receiving a firing state signal from condition transmission circuit 564 of firing control circuit 312 (main controller 261 The emission permission state signal indicating that the emission permission signal is being transmitted) is transmitted to the permission reception circuit 565 of the emission control circuit 312. After step S6307, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the firing permission state signal corresponds to information related to the firing state information.

  If a negative decision is made in step S6304, the value of the firing timer is decremented by 1 in step S6308. After that, in step S6307, a firing permission state signal is transmitted to the sub control device 262, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative decision is made in step S6301, it is decided in step S6309 whether or not the firing state signal is received. If a negative decision is made in step S6309, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6309, then in step S6310 the firing permission flag is set to ON.

  In a succeeding step S6311, a ball sending signal is transmitted to the permission receiving circuit 565 of the firing control circuit 312. Further, in step S6312, "300" corresponding to 0.6 seconds is set to the firing timer. As a result, the game ball is reliably set at the launch position by the ball feeding device 63, and then the game ball is launched by the launch device 60, and the main control device 261 is launched from the launch control circuit 312. While continuing to receive the signal, the main control device 261 transmits a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  After step S6312, in step S6307, a firing permission state signal is transmitted to the sub control device 262, and then this processing is ended.

  Next, the notification state setting process performed in the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S6401, it is determined whether or not the sub control device 262 receives the firing permission state signal from the main control device 261. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6401, it is decided in step S6402 whether or not the high-ball entering state (probability variation mode or time reduction mode). When a negative determination is made in step S6402, it is determined in step S6403 whether or not the value of the fluctuation time grasping timer exceeds “5500” corresponding to 11 seconds.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6402, it is decided in step S6404 whether or not the value of the fluctuation time grasping timer exceeds “4000” corresponding to 8 seconds. In the low-ball entry state, the timing of developing into a super-reach effect 11 seconds after the variable display is started (the effect for exclusive use of the super-reach is started in the decorative pattern display device 42) is reached, and in the high-ball entry state. , 8 seconds after the variable display is started, the timing to develop into the super reach performance is reached.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6403 or step S6404, it is determined in step S6405 whether or not the during-specific-effect flag is set to ON. In the present embodiment, when the effect (continuous notice effect) that is performed over a plurality of continuous variable displays is performed, the specific effect flag is turned on.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6405, it is determined in step S6406 whether or not the prefetch pending effect flag is set to ON. When a negative determination is made in step S6406, that is, the firing permission state signal is received, and the variation display time is less than 11 seconds after the start, and the specific effect is being performed (in this example, the continuous notice effect is being performed). ) And the prefetch hold icon 463 is not derived, the notification valid flag is turned on in step S6407. After step S6407, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6401, that is, if the firing permission state signal from the main control device 261 (the firing state signal from the firing control circuit 312) is interrupted, the notification valid flag is turned off in step S6408. Then, this process is terminated.

  Furthermore, in the case of affirmative determination in step S6403 or step S6404, that is, the variation display time on the special display devices 43a and 43b has been 11 seconds or more than 8 seconds since the start, and it corresponds to the variation display. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 42 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, when it is highly possible that a relatively high jackpot expectation effect has been derived, after turning off the notification valid flag in step S6408, This process ends.

  In addition, in the case of affirmative determination in step S6405, that is, in the case of continuous notice production in which the jackpot expectation degree increases as the number of times of variable display from which a series of production is derived increases, the notification valid flag is generated in step S6408. After turning off, this processing ends.

  Further, in the case of affirmative determination in step S6406, that is, in the hold display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42, the look-ahead hold icon 463 that suggests the expected jackpot degree of the corresponding variable display is derived (look-ahead hold effect). If the notification valid flag is turned off in step S6408, the present process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the super reach effect, the continuous notice effect, and the look-ahead hold effect correspond to the specific effect.

  Next, the opening notice notification setting process performed in the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

  First, in step S6501, it is determined whether or not a notification timing command (see step S2117 in FIG. 24) output from the main control device 261 is received 0.7 seconds before the second starting winning device 33b is opened. To do. If a negative decision is made in step S6501, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6501, it is decided in step S6502 whether or not the notification valid flag is set to ON.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S6502, then in step S6503, a pseudo permission flag used for deciding whether or not to displace the pseudo blade member 431 (by itself) to the functional position is set to ON. After step S6503, this process ends. If a negative decision is made in step S6502, this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, the pseudo blade opening control process of step S3911 of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a blade closing command (see step S2205 in FIG. 27) output from the main controller 261 is received at the timing when the blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position. To do. If a positive determination is made in step S4601, a process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position is performed in step S4602. By performing the process, the pseudo blade member 431 controlled by the sub control device 262 is controlled by the main control device 261 and is synchronized with the blade member 37 that is displaced from the open position to the closed position. It is designed to be displaced from to the standby position. After step S4602, in step S4603, the process of turning off the light emitting portion 445 (see FIG. 47) of the base plate 402 of the starting winning unit 401 is performed, and then the present process is terminated. Also, in the case of negative determination in step S4601 In step S4604, a blade opening command (step S2412 in FIG. 26, step S2216 in FIG. 27) output from the main control device 261 at the timing when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position. It is determined whether or not it has been received. When a positive determination is made in step S4604, a process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position is performed in step S4605. By performing the processing, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced from the standby position to the functional position in synchronization with the blade member 37 that is displaced from the closed position to the open position. After step S4605, in step S4606, the light emitting unit 445 (see FIG. 47) of the base plate 402 of the starting winning unit 401 is caused to emit light, and then this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, the function of turning on the light emitting unit 445 in step S4605 constitutes the open state teaching means.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4604, in step S4607, an opening confirmation command (FIG. 24) output from the main control device 261 at a timing 0.2 seconds before the second starting winning device 33b is opened. It is determined whether or not (step S2119) has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4607, then in step S4608 a single operation invalidation flag that prohibits the pseudo blade member 431 from operating alone is set to ON.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4607, in step S4609, at a timing at which the opening / closing process of the series of second starting prize winning devices 33b (blade members 37) performed by winning in the ball entry support lottery is completed. It is determined whether or not the support period end command (see step S2211 in FIG. 27) output from the main control device 261 has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4609, then in step S46010 the individual operation invalidation flag is turned off.

  After step S4610 or step S4608, or if a negative determination is made in step S4609, in step S4611, the pseudo blade member 431 is independently displaced to the functional position (the blade member 37 is in the closed position). It is determined whether or not the pseudo open flag indicating that there is is set to ON.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4611, in step S4612, it is set to ON only when the notification valid flag is set to ON at a timing of 0.7 seconds before opening the second starting winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the pseudo permission flag (see step S6503 in FIG. 43) is turned on. If a negative decision is made in step S4612, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4612, then it is decided in step S4613 whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If a negative decision is made in step S4613, the pseudo open flag is set to ON in step S4614.

  In subsequent step S4615, a process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to an intermediate position between the standby position and the functional position is performed. Furthermore, in step S4616, a process of blinking the light emitting portion 445 (see FIG. 47) of the base plate 402 of the starting winning unit 401 is performed, and in step S4617, the sound effect accompanying the displacement of the dummy blade member 431 to the intermediate position is generated. Perform the process to generate. That is, the player is informed that the second starting winning device 33b is opened by performing the processing of steps S4615 to S4617 0.7 seconds before the second starting winning device 33b is opened. It will be notified in advance.

  In the present embodiment, the visual and audio aspects of the variable winning unit 401 performed based on the processing of steps S4615 to S4617 correspond to the opening notice, and the pseudo blade member 431 that can derive the opening notice. The light emitting unit 445 and the speaker SP form an opening notice device. Further, the function of switching the notification valid flag between ON and OFF constitutes the notification state changing means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time (arrival time) required for the game ball to be reached from the launching device 60 to the second starting winning device 33b is approximately 4 to 6 seconds. For this reason, if the game ball is fired after recognizing the notice of opening notice which is made 0.7 seconds before the second starting winning device 33b is opened, the game ball will be secondly released. The starting prize winning device 33b cannot be won. That is, the notice of opening notice makes it easy for the player to see how the game ball is entering the second starting winning device 33b that is in the open state (make an impression), and the game can be performed even in the low ball entering state. This is done in order to show that the ball has a structure that makes it easy to enter the second starting winning device 33b.

  After step S4617, the pseudo permission flag is turned off in step S4618, and then the present process ends. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4613, then steps S4614 to S4617 are skipped and step S4618 is entered. That is, in the big hit state, the pseudo vane member 431 is not configured to perform a single operation.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4611, it is decided in step S4619 whether or not the single operation invalidation flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S4619, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4619, then in step S4620 the pseudo opening flag is turned off, and in step S4621 the process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position is carried out, and then this process ends. .

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the vane member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the moving vane member 37 and the front of the vane member 37 displaced to the open position are covered so as to cover the pseudo vane. The member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the front of the moving blade member 37 is covered so that the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced from the functional position to the standby position. It is configured. Therefore, it is inconvenient for the pseudo blade member 431 to be in the intermediate position (half-open position) when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position. Therefore, prior to displacing the blade member 37 to the open position, if the pseudo blade member 431 is at the intermediate position, the process of returning the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position is performed.

  In addition, whether or not the notification valid flag is set to ON, the game ball has entered the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b (of the starting entrance detecting switches 224a and 224b). When the detection is performed), the corresponding start winning effect sound is derived. In the present embodiment, the function of deriving the start winning effect sound constitutes the variable ball teaching means.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in step S3914 of the normal processing (FIG. 32) of the sub control device 262, when the customer waiting effect (demonstration screen display) is set, first, the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. It is determined whether or not the specified time has elapsed in the unreleased state, and when the determination is affirmative, whether or not the sub control device 262 receives the firing permission state signal from the main control device 261 ( It is configured to determine whether or not the notification valid flag is set to ON) and to display the demo screen display when the determination is affirmative. As a result, the player operates the handle 18 to shoot the game ball, and the player can enter the game ball despite attempting to enter the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33b. By displaying the demo screen in a state where the player does not exist, it is possible to reliably avoid a situation in which the player is given a bad impression. In the present embodiment, the state in which the demonstration screen display is derived on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the standby state of the rendering means.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the opening notice indicating that the second starting winning device 33b is opened 0.7 seconds before the second starting winning device 33b is opened. It is configured so that the notification can be derived. In the opening notice of the present embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 of the second starting winning device 33b is displaced, the light emitting section 445 of the starting winning unit 401 is caused to emit light, and the corresponding sound effect is derived from the speaker SP. Has been done. Then, the state in which the second start winning device 33b is opened by deriving the opening notice, and further, the state where the game ball is entering the second starting winning device 33b which is in the opened state. Can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, even in the low winning state, the second starting prize device 33b is relatively easily opened, and it is possible to appeal that the game ball is easy to enter the second starting prize device 33b. it can. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game machine is easy to play, and it is possible to promote the increase of repeaters and the increase of one game time. Also, if the ball muscle of the game ball is significantly displaced from the second starting winning device 33b, it can be corrected.

  On the other hand, in a state where the main control device 261 does not receive a firing state signal from the firing control circuit 312 (a state in which the sub control device 262 does not receive a firing permission state signal from the main control device 261, a notice of release is issued). Is configured not to be derived. Therefore, for example, the main control device 261 determines that the player does not need to shoot the game ball (the second start winning device 33b may be opened even while the game ball is not being shot). Despite the fact that the game ball has been stopped, it is appealed that the second start prize device 33b is opened by the announcement of the opening notice (the open state). 2 The situation where the player is forced to pay attention to the starting winning device 33b) and makes the player uncomfortable (it is perceived as a dislike as if the player is informing that the player is losing). It can be avoided.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, the arrival time from the launch of the game ball by the launching device 60 to the arrival of the game ball at the second start winning device 33b is approximately 4 seconds to 6 seconds. For this reason, even if the game ball is hurriedly fired in response to the notice of opening notice which is derived 0.7 seconds before the second start winning device 33b is opened, the game ball is second started winning prize. It is impossible to enter the device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's emotions are reversed by the notification of opening notice being given in such a situation, and the notification of opening notice is annoying and annoying. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by giving the notice of opening.

  In addition, when the after-announcement time (0.7 seconds) for opening the second starting winning device 33b is longer than the arrival time (4 seconds to 6 seconds), the second starting winning device 33b is opened. In a state in which there is a possibility that the game ball will be fired, the player will not enter the second start winning a prize device 33b by stopping the game ball, confirming the opening notice, and then performing a hitting operation of firing the game ball. The number of game balls can be reduced. Therefore, there is a concern that there may be a relatively large difference in the advantages and disadvantages in the progress of the game between the player who performs the stop striking operation and the player who does not. In this respect, by making the post-notice time shorter than the arrival time, it is possible to suppress the stopping operation and suppress the concern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the firing control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 1451, receives a firing switch signal from the stop switch 1455, and receives a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311. In this case, the firing control circuit 312 transmits a firing state signal to the main controller 261. As a result, the main control device 261 receives from the firing control circuit 312 a firing state signal that is a suitable combination of the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal, and the firing control circuit 312 receives the firing permission information. In controlling the transmission or the transmission of the firing permission state signal to the sub-control device 262, it is not necessary to judge, for example, whether a touch signal, a firing switch signal, or a CR unit connection signal is input. Can be simplified.

  On the other hand, the dial position signal from the variable resistor 1445 is not a condition for transmitting the firing state signal. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the rotary operation body 1402 of the handle 18 is at the reference position, the protrusion of the stop switch 1455 is depressed (based on the biasing force acting on the rotary operation body 1402), and The pressing operation of the stop lever 18a is detected by the stop switch 1455. That is, the firing switch signal is not transmitted. Therefore, even if the dial position signal is not transmitted to the main control device 261, and thus to the sub control device 262, the sub control device 262 recognizes that the game ball has not been shot at the reference position of the rotary operation body 1402. The state in which the notice of opening is not issued (notification stopped state) can be set. As a result, it is not necessary to perform control such that the dial position signal is transmitted to the sub control device 262, and the control can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the rotating operation body 1402 of the handle 18 is at the reference position,
The rotary operation body 1402 (operation fitting 1405) and the touch sensor 1451 (touch fitting 1452) are configured to be insulated. That is, the touch signal is not transmitted. Therefore, even if the dial position signal is not transmitted to the main control device 261, and thus to the sub control device 262, the sub control device 262 recognizes that the game ball has not been shot at the reference position of the rotary operation body 1402. The state in which the notice of opening is not issued (notification stopped state) can be set. As a result, it is not necessary to perform control such that the dial position signal is transmitted to the sub control device 262, and the control can be simplified.

  It should be noted that, of the configuration in which the protruding portion of the stop switch 1455 is retracted when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position and the configuration in which the rotary operation body 1402 (operation metal fitting 1405) and the touch sensor 1451 are insulated from each other. Only one of them may be adopted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the rotary operation body 1402 is at the reference position, the rotary operation body 1402 and the ground metal fitting 1406 are electrically connected. Therefore, when the player touches the rotary operation body 1402 (metal-plated operation surface SH) when starting the game, even if the player is charged with static electricity, the player is charged. The static electricity that has been generated does not flow to the touch sensor 1451 side and is released to the ground through the grounding metal fitting 1406. Therefore, when the player touches the rotary operation body 1402, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high voltage based on static electricity is applied to the touch detection circuit including the touch sensor 1451, which is caused by static electricity. It is possible to suppress adverse effects on the touch detection circuit and the like (electrostatic breakdown, etc.).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub-control device 262 receives the firing permission state signal from the main control device 261, even if the sub-control device 262 receives the firing permission state signal. (In this example, when the timing reaches the time when the super reach effect is developed, or the timing when the normal reach ends, it is 8 seconds in the high entry state and 11 seconds in the low entry state.) The flag is turned off so that the opening notice is not issued. Furthermore, the state in which the specific effect flag is set to ON and the “continuous notice effect” is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the prefetch pending effect flag is set to ON, and the “prefetching” icon 463 is used. Even when the "holding effect" is derived, the notification valid flag is turned off and the opening notification is not performed.

  Therefore, in the middle of a specific production such as a production with high expectation for jackpots or a production that can be expected to improve the expectation for jackpots, a notification of opening notice that has nothing to do with the particular production is given, which hinders the specific production. It is possible to avoid such a situation that it will be done. Therefore, the player can easily concentrate on the specific effect, and can enjoy the specific effect more. In addition, since the notice of opening notice is given during the specific effect, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the notice of opening notice is misunderstood as a part of the special effect, resulting in disappointment.

  In addition, in general, when the specific effect is derived in the low ball entering state, the hand is released from the handle 18 in order to suppress the generation of waste balls (game balls entering the out opening 36). Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the notification is stopped if there is no operation information of the steering wheel 18, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the notice of opening notice is derived in the specific effect. However, in the high-ball entering state, the game ball easily enters the second starting winning device 33b and the generation of waste balls is suppressed, so that many players continue to shoot the game ball. Therefore, if the main control device 261 is simply configured to be in the notification function state if it is receiving the firing state signal, the specific effect may be derived even in the high ball entry state. Instead, there is a concern that the chances of the announcement of opening notice being derived will increase. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball is easily inserted into the second starting winning device 33b even in the low-ball entering state, and the concern becomes more remarkable. In this respect, by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been derived, it is possible to more reliably prevent the specific effect and the notice of opening notice from overlapping.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, after the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is started, the notification of the opening is not issued when the specified time has elapsed without ending the variable display. It is configured to be. That is, in a state in which any one of the super reach effect, the long variation effect (chance variation), and the premium reach effect is derived, the notification stop state is set. Therefore, it is possible to collectively perform processing such as determining whether each of the super reach effect, the long variation effect, and the premium reach effect has been derived (in addition, a plurality of patterns are often prepared for each effect). It is possible to simplify the control. In addition, from the start of the variable display until the notification is stopped after the specified time, the notification function state in which the opening notice is given is provided, so that the super reach effect, the long fluctuation effect, and the premium reach effect are the highlights. In the midst of the performance, the second start winning device 33b is opened immediately after the variation display starts, while the configuration is such that the notice of opening is not given in order to further enjoy the performance. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is known in advance that the effect will be derived due to the fact that it is recognized that the notice of opening has not been accompanied.

  Further, in both of the notification function state in which the notice of opening is performed and the notification stop state in which it is not performed, when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, The winning effect sound is derived based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting prize switch 224b. Therefore, for example, in the case where the reaction (winning sound effect) that the game ball has entered the first starting prize device 33a or the second starting prize device 33b is stopped even if the notification ball is in the stopped state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is anxious about whether or not the detection of the amount of game balls entered in the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b has been surely made this time.

  Further, in both the notification function state and the notification stop state, when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, the light emitting portion 445 of the starting winning unit 401 is turned on. . Therefore, for example, when the reaction (light emission of the light emitting unit 445) that the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is stopped even if the notification stop state is given, It is possible to avoid such a situation that even if a game ball is thrown into the second start winning device 33b which is in the open state this time, there is a fear that the game will be processed as usual.

  In addition, the opening notice of the present embodiment is designed to displace the pseudo blade member 431 included in the second starting winning device 33b. For this reason, since the opening advance notice for notifying in advance that the second starting winning device 33 will be in the open state is derived in the second starting winning device 33b itself, the opening notice and the second starting winning device 33b. The effect of strengthening the connection with and attracting attention to the second starting winning device 33b becomes more remarkable. Furthermore, even if the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position side (intermediate position), the blade member 37 is not actually displaced to the open position. Therefore, for example, the blade member 37 is set to the open position for presentation. However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b at the timing when the open position is set.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub-control device 262 determines that the state in which the variable display is not performed in the special variable displays 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) (the state in which the variable display is stopped) continues for the specified time. , It is determined whether or not the firing permission state signal is received from the main control device 261, and when it is determined that it is not received, the decorative pattern display device 42 derives a demo screen display and receives it. When it is determined, the demo screen display is not derived (cancelled). Therefore, although the player continues to shoot the game ball, the game ball unfortunately does not enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and the demo screen display is derived on the decorative symbol display device 42. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the player is very offended.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

  (A) In the above embodiment, in the state where the main control device 261 does not receive the firing state signal from the firing control circuit 312 (the state where the sub control device 262 does not receive the firing permission state signal from the main control device 261). Although the opening notice is not derived, the main controller 261 has received the firing state signal if the game ball can be expected to enter the second starting prize device 33b sufficiently. It may be configured such that the opening notice is derived even when there is no such notification.

  More specifically, for example, a post-stop time measuring timer that measures the time from when the game ball is not fired by the launching device 60 is provided (when provided in the main control device 261, the launching state signal is interrupted. The time from the start of the game is measured, and when the sub-control device 262 is provided, the time from the time when the launch permission status signal is interrupted is measured), and the specified time after the game ball is not launched by the launch device 60. If it is determined that (for example, 4 seconds) has not elapsed, the notification valid flag is maintained in the on state (the notification function state is maintained), and if it is determined that the specified time has come, the notification valid is determined. The flag may be turned off (notification stopped state). That is, immediately after stopping the launch of the game ball by the launching device 60, there is a possibility that the game ball that has been launched immediately before that is located upstream of the second start winning device 33b in the game area. Furthermore, if the second start winning device 33b is opened at that timing, such a game ball may enter the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the notice of opening is not issued even though the game ball enters the second starting prize device 33b. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities to give the notice of opening notice at the timing when the game ball may enter the second starting winning device 33b.

  In addition, a function that can determine whether or not a prescribed time has elapsed since the game ball was not fired by the launching device 60 constitutes a post-stop time determination means. Also, if the post-stop time determination means starts the measurement of the stipulated time when the firing state signal is not transmitted to the main control device 261, a state in which the game ball is not set in the launch device 60 is started. Although it is in the notification function state even in the state of "blanking" driven by the launching device 60, if the player notices "blanking", it will be dealt with immediately (stop the firing operation, clear the ball clogging of the upper plate 19). Or to set the game ball to the launcher 60 by supplying the game ball to the upper plate 19 in which the game ball is not stored). The impact of doing so is small.

  (B) In the above-described embodiment, the sub control device 262 is configured to receive from the main control device 261 a firing permission state signal indicating that the gaming ball can be fired, but such a signal is omitted. At the same time, in a state in which there is a high possibility that the game ball has not been launched, the opening advance notice may be configured not to be derived.

  For example, in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, when three or more pieces of fluctuation information are stored in the first special fluctuation holding area in a reserved manner (for the holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area in which the fluctuation information is stored, The notification valid flag may be turned off when the number is three or more). That is, the upper limit of the first variation display is four, and even if the game ball is entered into the first starting winning device 33a (even if overwinning) while the four first variation displays are reserved. Since the win / loss lot cannot be received for that amount, the player shoots a game ball so as not to exceed the upper limit of the pending storage of the variation information in order to avoid such a situation. Refraining from being done. In this way, by turning off the notification valid flag when the holding upper limit is approaching, even if the launch permission status signal indicating that the gaming ball is ready to be launched is not received from the main control device 261, the game is played. In a situation in which it is highly possible that a person has stopped firing the game ball, it is possible to set a state (notification stop state) in which the advance notice is not issued. Therefore, even if the sub control device 262 does not receive the launch permission state signal, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the notice of release is derived even though the game ball is not launched.

  Also, while the jackpot state, the pending variable display is not exhausted, but if the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second starting prize device 33b, the corresponding variable display will occur. Will be stored on hold. In other words, there is a high possibility that over-winning will occur during the jackpot state, and at the stage when the jackpot state occurs, the greater the number of variation displays that are held after the variation display that is a jackpot, the greater the possibility of over-winning. Will be higher. For this reason, when an effect with a high jackpot expectation occurs, the game ball is not fired. Furthermore, depending on the player's feeling that he or she wants to concentrate on the production with high jackpot expectation, or that the fluctuation display with high jackpot expectation is long and wants to avoid over-winning during that time, a game ball during the production with high jackpot expectation. It is highly possible that the launch of the

  In this respect, as in the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is not ended after the variable display is started, the preset time corresponding to the game mode is exceeded, or a continuous notice is given. Or a specific effect with a high expectation for a jackpot has been derived, or such a specific effect has been derived, as in the case where the pre-reading pending effect by the pre-reading pending icon 463 has been derived. In a high possibility state, by turning off the notification valid flag, it is highly possible that the player has stopped the emission of the game ball even if the emission permission state signal is not received from the main control device 261. The state in which the notice of opening is not issued (notification stopped state) can be set. In that case, the process in which the main control device 261 sends the firing permission state signal to the sub control device 262 and the process in the sub control device 262 based on this signal can be omitted, and the control can be simplified.

  However, in the high-ball entering state (probability variation mode, time shortening mode), many players continue to shoot the game ball even if the specific effect is derived, so in the high-ball entering state, the game ball is being shot. However, it is less likely that the specific effect has not been derived. For this reason, at least in the high-ball entry state, it is determined whether or not the specific effect has been derived, and if it is determined that the specific effect has been derived, the notice of opening is not derived (as usual). It is desirable to configure it so that it is in a state.

  (C) In the above-described embodiment, a specific effect with a high jackpot expectation is derived in the decorative pattern display device 42, such as a lapse of a specified time from the start of the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b (possibly. In the case of (high), and when a specific effect such as a continuous notice effect or a look-ahead hold effect is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, it is configured to be in the notification stop state in which the release notice is not performed. The type of effect that is the target of the specific effect is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model.

  For example, a flag that is turned on when super-reach is performed is provided by stopping the notification stop state according to the time after the variable display is started, and when the flag is turned on, notification stop is performed. It may be configured to be in a state. Further, for example, in the above embodiment, regardless of the type, the read-ahead hold icon 263 is configured to be in the notification stop state only by being led out to the decorative symbol display device 42. However, the read-ahead hold icon 263 is configured. The notification stop state does not have to be set for all types of, for example, only when the pre-reading pending icon 463 having a high jackpot expectation degree is derived (for example, the jackpot expectation degree in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red). (Only when green and red are derived in a high configuration), the notification stop state may be set.

  Further, for example, the button effect using the effect button 125 may be set as the specific effect, and when the button effect is derived, the notification stop state may be set. In this case, in the state in which the player is prompted to operate the effect operation means, the opening advance notice not related to the effect is given, so that the player can notify the opening advance notice and the effect operation means. It is possible to avoid a situation in which they are confused about what they should do, or they make them expect a surplus.

  (D) Further, it may be determined whether or not the game ball is being fired by directly detecting the game ball being fired. For example, a launch ball detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined position of the rail 50 is provided, and in a state where the game ball is normally detected by the launch ball detection sensor, a notification function state is given in which an advance notice is given. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the notification is stopped in a state where it is not detected. Furthermore, a pair of launch ball detection sensors may be provided along the extending direction of the rail 50, and it may be possible to determine that the game ball is flowing back through the rail 50 according to the order of detection. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is uncomfortable by performing the opening advance notice when the game ball cannot be fired in the game area. Further, it is possible to determine that it is "blank driving", and it is also possible to set the notification stop state in response to such a state.

  (E) In the above embodiment, the sub-control device 262 can input, via the main control device 261, launch state information (shooting permission state signal) indicating that the launch device 60 is in a state capable of launching a game ball. By using the configuration, it is configured not to notify the opening notice when the game ball is not fired, or to prevent the demo screen display from being derived when the game ball is fired, but especially The present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and processing using the firing state information can be added / changed for each model. For example, in the display setting process of the normal process (FIG. 32) of the sub control device 262, it is determined whether or not the firing permission state signal from the main control device 261 is received, and if the determination is negative, The decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to facilitate addition of specific effects such as cut-in effects and button effects in the variable display.

  In other words, since the player is in a state where he / she can release his / her hand from the handle 18 and concentrate on the effect, the player can enjoy the variable display more by performing the effect more actively at that timing. Therefore, it is possible to associate the derivation probability of a specific effect with the operation state of the player with respect to the handle 18, and it is possible to derive an effect that matches the state of the player as much as possible. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a player operates a right hand, an operation requesting the player to operate the effect operation means is derived when the handle 18 is being operated. However, there is a concern that the player will be asked to make a decision such as releasing the handle 18 from the handle 18, which may give the player a feeling of impatience or invite an operation error of the handle 18. It is possible to suppress or avoid the above problem by determining whether or not to derive such an effect depending on the operation state of.

  Furthermore, when the specific effect is an effect in which the jackpot expectation is increased to some extent, whether the player is interested in the effect (whether there is a touch signal) based on the operation state of the operation means. May be determined and the content (expansion) of the effect may be determined. For example, in a state where it is conceivable that the player is eagerly watching the effect by releasing the hand (when the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is detected, it is more sure that the user is eagerly watching the effect. It may be configured such that a finer effect (increase in display objects such as mini characters, increase in cut ratio of effect, etc.) is easily derived.

  It should be noted that, when it is determined that the specific effect should not be derived due to the operation of the handle 18, it is desirable that a substitute effect be derived.

  In addition, the probability of deriving the specific effect when the sub control device 262 receives the firing permission state signal may be set to be higher in the high entry state than in the low entry state. . In other words, in the high-ball entering state where it is possible to continue to shoot the game ball, even if the game ball is fired, by configuring so that a specific effect is derived, an opportunity to derive a particular effect It is possible to avoid a situation in which is lost or is significantly reduced.

  (F) Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, it is summarized that the firing control circuit 312 receives the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the main control device 261. Although it is configured to transmit the firing status signal transmitted by the above, they may be configured to be transmitted individually. Further, the dial position signal may be transmitted to main controller 261.

  When outputting these various signals (or information corresponding to them) individually, the main control device 261 determines that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, and the dial position signal (or these signals). (Corresponding information) can be individually output to the sub-control device 262, and it becomes possible to perform a more detailed presentation or notification using such individual information. For example, in the sub-control device 262, if there is a touch signal and no launch switch signal, it is possible to make an announcement for beginners such as "a game ball is launched when the hand is released from the stop lever 18a". Become. Further, for example, if the CR unit connection signal is not received, error control indicating that the CR unit is not connected can be performed. In addition, for example, a touch position signal is not received but a dial position signal is being received, or a firing switch signal is being received even though a dial position signal is not being received. In addition, it is possible to perform the notification control that the failure of the handle 18 is suspected. Among the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, and the dial position signal (or information corresponding thereto), the signal output from the firing control circuit 312 to the main controller 261 and the touch signal. The signal output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 among the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, and the dial position signal (or information corresponding thereto) can be set appropriately for each model. is there.

  When the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 are configured to be able to receive a dial position signal (or information corresponding thereto), in the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like controlled by the sub control device 262, You can get the strength of launching a game ball again. That is, for example, in a configuration in which the launch position of the game ball changes according to the game mode, the dial of the strength with which the game ball is launched in the left side region in the game mode in which the game ball is launched in the right side region of the game region. When a position signal is detected, an announcement such as "Please hit right" is announced, and a game ball is launched in the left side area. In the game mode, a dial position signal of the strength at which the game ball is launched in the right side area is detected. In such a case, it becomes possible to derive an announcement such as "Please return to the left." Therefore, it is possible to more finely assist the game of the player. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a desired launch position (strength) of a game ball changes according to a game mode or a game state, for example, a predetermined ball entering means arranged at an undesired position in the game area By detecting the ball entering (or passing), it is possible to suppress the situation in which the game ball that has been launched is wasted, as compared with a configuration in which an announcement is made to ask the launch position again.

  Note that, for example, in the normal mode, the game ball is launched in the left side area of the game area, and in the jackpot state, the game ball is launched in the right side area of the game area (for example, the variable winning device 32 is installed in the right side area). ), The main control device 261 waits for the shift to the big hit state until the dial position signal having the strength of “right hit” is made when the shift to the big hit state is made, and the sub control device 262 makes An announcement indicating that it is on standby (for example, “... standby in mode standby. If you hit“ right ”... mode will start”, etc.) is derived by the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like. You may comprise. In this case, the player's disadvantage caused by the inconsistency between the game state and the launch strength (launching position) of the game ball is suppressed, and the game state that is supposed to shift is not started due to the inconsistency. It is possible to eliminate the player's embarrassment.

  It should be noted that, in the setting process of various fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 20) of the main controller 261, it is determined whether or not the firing state signal is received from the firing control circuit 312, and the determination is negative. In this case, it may be configured such that the one having a long variation time is easily selected. Further, the detailed configuration of the firing control circuit 312 is not particularly limited, and for example, it may be provided on a substrate different from the power supply circuit 313, and the condition transmission circuit 564 and the permission reception circuit 565 may be provided. The configuration may not be distinguished.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by operating the stop lever 18a of the handle 18, the stop switch 1455 (pressing operation portion 1456) is pressed, and the firing switch signal to the firing control circuit 312 is interrupted. The firing control circuit 312 is configured to be able to determine that the stop lever 18a is not operated (the operation for stopping the firing of the game ball is not performed) by receiving the firing switch signal. However, for example, when the stop lever 18a is operated and the stop switch 1455 (pressing operation unit 1456) as the stop operation detecting means is pressed, a firing switch signal is output and the firing switch signal is received. It is possible to determine that the stop lever 18a is not operated based on the fact that it is not It may be configured to.

  (G) The mode of the notice of opening notice is not particularly limited. For example, the pair of blade members 37 of the second starting winning device 33b is opened / closed, or the decorative pattern display device 42 (for example, the lower right part of the display unit). ), But may be configured such that the notice of opening notice is given. However, it is preferable that the notice of opening is given to the second starting winning device 33b that is the subject of notice of opening, or a portion in the vicinity thereof.

  The configuration of the starting winning unit 401 is not particularly limited as long as it includes at least the second starting winning device 33b. For example, the pseudo blade member 431 can be omitted. However, in the starting winning unit 401, it is possible to notify that the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, or that the second starting winning device 33b will be in the open state soon (open notice). Is desirable. For example, the front decoration portion 403 may be configured such that light is incident from the side so that a mode imitating the front limbs of a whale emerges in the light incident portion. More specifically, the reflection angle of the light incident on the front decoration portion 403 from the side with respect to the predetermined range of the front decoration portion 403 is different from that of the other portions (in the front decoration portion 403). A light guide plate that does not totally reflect but is irradiated forward is processed. The light guide plate may be configured to emit light at the timing when the light emitting unit 445 is emitting light in the above embodiment.

  In addition, the reaction of the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b (winning sound effect in the above example), and the second starting winning device 33b being in an open state. The reaction (light emission of the light emitting unit 445 in the above example) is not particularly limited, and for example, the light emitting unit also when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. The light 445 may be caused to emit light, or the pseudo blade member 431 may be configured to reciprocate slightly when the second starting winning device 33b is opened.

  (H) Further, in the above-described embodiment, although the notice of opening is not issued at all in the notice stopped state, a part of the notice of opening may be performed, or the same. It may be configured to be discreet. For example, in the notification function state, the light emitting unit 445 and the pseudo blade member 431 of the starting winning unit 401, the decorative symbol display device 42, and the speaker SP give the first opening advance notice, and in the notification stop state, the starting winning unit. The second opening advance notice may be provided only by the light emitting unit 445 of 401. In this case, since it is possible to make the second opening notice not so noticeable, it is possible for a player who likes to see a game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b in the opened state. It is possible to have a configuration in which both the player who wants to concentrate on the specific effect having a high jackpot expectation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is satisfied.

  (I) In the above embodiment, the effect using the pseudo blade member 431, the trigger for activating the pseudo blade member 431, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model.

  For example, in the decorative pattern display device 42, whether or not the pseudo blade member 431 is set to the functional position when the effect button 125 is operated during a jackpot with a payout which has not yet been taught to be a probability variation jackpot. It may be configured to perform a pseudo open lottery during the big hit. Further, the table which is normally referred to when the jackpot is small, has a small displacement pattern (for example, 35%) that displaces the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position side by about 40 degrees and a large displacement pattern (for example, 35%) that displaces the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. 5%) and a pattern that does not displace (for example, 60%), while the table that is referenced when the probability variation jackpot does not displace a small displacement pattern (for example, 45%) and a large displacement pattern (for example, 10%). It may be configured to be divided into a pattern (for example, 40%) and a fixed pattern (for example, 5%) in which the promotion effect for the probability variation jackpot is fixed.

  In the above embodiment, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are operated by the motor, but they may be operated by using another driving means such as a solenoid. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the motor is provided in a one-to-one relationship with the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 provided in a pair, but, for example, one driving means provides a pair of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431. May be configured to operate. When the pseudo-side motor 432 is provided in a one-to-one relationship with the pseudo-blade member 431 as in the above-described embodiment, only one of the pair of pseudo-blade members 431 is used in the presentation using the pseudo-blade member 431. It is also possible to move it and to make separate movements on the left and right.

  (J) In the above-described embodiment, regarding the configuration relating to the ease of entering the second starting winning device 33b, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b in the low entering state is sufficient to allow the entering of the game ball 1 Even if it is set to seconds, even in the low entry state, the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to the same as the high entry state (1.86 seconds), and the winning probability in the entry support lottery is about Although it is set to about 1 / 7.5 or a slider 411 is provided on the base plate 402 of the starting winning unit 401, the second starting winning device 33b can easily enter a game ball even in a low entering state. However, these configurations are not particularly limited. For example, the second starting winning device 33b may be configured to be opened twice for 0.6 seconds each time the winning support lottery is won in the low-ball entering state, or the upper limit of the time may be eliminated to win the prize. Only the upper limit of the number may be set, or the slider 411 may be omitted.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, it is derived when the game ball enters the second starting prize device 33b rather than the first starting winning effect sound that is derived when the game ball enters the first starting prize device 33a. The second start winning effect sound that is played may be set to be larger. In this case, the second start winning device 33b is opened, and it is possible to more positively appeal that the game ball is in the second starting winning device 33b.

  (K) In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the firing timing (the firing interval) of the firing device 60, but the invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration and is for driving the firing control circuit 312. The IC 561 may be configured to measure the firing timing (the firing interval). In this case, the control load on main controller 261 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the opening advance notice is configured to be derived 0.7 seconds before the second start winning device 33b is opened, but after the opening advance notice is given, The time until the second start winning device 33b is opened is shorter than the time (arrival time) required from the time the game ball is launched by the launch device 60 to the second starting winning device 33b. Just do it.

  (L) The mode and display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, the prefetching holding effect using the prereading holding icon 463, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the mode of the hold icon 461, it is not taught which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display based on the entered ball. In some cases, the hold icon 461 has information indicating whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or in some cases such a mode (the predetermined lottery is won). When a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the player performs a predetermined input operation, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the input operation is performed, the aspect is derived.) You may comprise.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of positions of the decorative pattern display device 42 can be detected, and the proximity detection means (for example, the light emitting unit) connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262. And a proximity detection sensor having a light receiving unit, a touch panel, or the like) may be provided. For example, when the player brings his finger or the like close to the read-ahead hold icon 463 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42, the read-ahead hold icon 463 is detected based on the detection of the finger or the like. The mode may be changed or moved. In this case, interest in the hold icon 461 can be improved.

  (M) In the above embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b (when the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b is detected) The effect (notification) corresponding to) is not particularly limited, and for example, the light emitting unit 445 of the starting winning unit 401 may emit light when the winning effect sound is derived. Even when the notification valid flag is turned off, it is desirable to perform some effect as a reaction to the game ball entering the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. Further, when the notification valid flag is turned off, the derivation of the winning effect sound may be stopped and only the light emission of the light emitting unit 445 may be performed. In this case, when the specific effect is derived, it is possible to make the user easily concentrate on the specific effect.

  In addition, for example, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, a sound effect is added (the jackpot state or the reach effect in the decorative pattern display device 42 may be excluded or the volume may be lowered). You may comprise.

  (N) In the above embodiment, the target of the opening notification is the second start winning device 33b, but it can be embodied as another winning device having an opening / closing device such as the variable winning device 32. .

  Further, although the number of the variable winning devices 32 is one in the above-described embodiment, two may be provided. Further, the arrangement and the number of the first start prize winning device 33a, the second start prize winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable prize winning device 32, etc. are not particularly limited, and may be appropriately arranged for each model. In addition, the second start winning device 33b may be configured so that the game ball can enter even in the closed state.

  (O) In the above-described embodiment, exchange of data (so-called mobile linked game) is performed between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine manufacturer or the like via a communication portable terminal owned by the player. It may be configured so that it can be performed. Furthermore, when terminating the mobile-linked game, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the mobile communication terminal, and at the same time, the mobile communication terminal In the configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of times of variation of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game may be configured to include information indicating the values of various counters. Furthermore, the information on the total number of game balls to be shot, the type of the derived effect, the number of times, the number of times the player has operated the effect button 125 during the button effect, and the like are also included in the two-dimensional code. Good. In this case, the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp the gaming status.

  The value of the counter may be erased by being two-dimensionally encoded, and the other values may be stored (even if the power is turned off). Further, the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo blade member 431 may be configured such that the player can select from several types (for the player performing the mobile linked game).

  (P) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable jackpot 32 of each jackpot type, etc. are not particularly limited and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may perform the same operation as the jackpot state of "2RS", and set the jackpot to which the "normal mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the “latent probability mode” is given after the jackpot state of “2RS” is finished, but instead, the “probability variation mode” may be given.

  In the decorative pattern display device 42, the teaching about winning the probability variation jackpot (15RS) with a payout may be performed at least by the time the corresponding jackpot state ends. , Even if the corresponding jackpot state is finished (even in the probability variation mode internally, the decorative symbol display device 42 shifts to the same pullback stage as the time reduction mode, and the special display device 43a in the time reduction mode. , 43b may exceed the upper limit number of times (100 times) in the time reduction mode, the transition to the probability variation stage may be performed.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the win / loss lottery is changed, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high-income state given after the jackpot state ends ( The above-described configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of variation times) are prepared.

  Further, in the winning / winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, the "small hit" may be won, or the "small win" may be omitted.

  In addition, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when the player wins, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the winning upper limit of the game ball in one opening to the second start winning device 33b may be set. More specifically, a starting winning upper limit counter that counts the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b until reaching the winning upper limit is provided, and when the second starting winning device 33b is opened, it is started. A value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set in the winning upper limit counter, and when the detection of the second starting prize switch 224b is performed, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the starting winning upper limit counter is performed to perform the second starting winning. Even if the timing for closing the device 33b has not yet arrived while the device 33b is in the open state, if the value of the starting winning upper limit counter becomes "0", the second starting winning device 33b is immediately opened. It may be configured to be in a closed state.

  In the above embodiment, when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for 1 second, and the second starting winning device 33b is 4 seconds, or the second starting. The winning device 33b is configured to be provided with either one of the second opening which is opened with an upper limit up to four game balls entering. In the case of a small opening, as in the above embodiment, A notice of opening is given 0.7 seconds before the opening of the second starting winning device 33b, and in the case of a large opening, the opening guidance is given 8 seconds before the opening of the second starting winning device 33b. You may. In this case, even if the game ball is fired after recognizing the opening guide for the large opening, it is expected that the game ball will be sufficiently charged into the second starting winning device 33b.

  (Q) In the above-described embodiment, the second variation display, which has been retained after the first variation display, which has already been suspended, is displayed in a suspended order such that the second variation display is digested before the first variation display. The second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display in the order of movement, but the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning a prize device 33a, And, regardless of whether it is the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b, the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. The corresponding variable displays may be held in order, and the previously held variable displays may be sequentially consumed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery performed based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a and the entry into the second starting winning device 33b are performed. The distribution ratio of the jackpot type that can be given is different from that when the jackpot is won in the win / loss lottery, but may be the same. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the prize balls to be awarded to the player depending on whether there is a ball to the first starting prize device 33a or a second starting prize device 33b. Although the numbers are different, they may be the same.

  (R) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the main process (see FIG. 9) and then the normal process (see FIG. 10), but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after the step S111 of the main process, the process of updating the counter value and the like performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above-described embodiment is performed, and, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. Note that, as the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring circuit 542 outputs the power failure signal SK1 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which a flag indicating occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (S) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the checking process (whether the win / fail flag or the like). It may be configured such that whether or not the big hit state is generated, the pattern of variable display, and the like are determined according to the (state).

  (T) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows the player to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the player from entering the specific area ( Detecting the game ball that entered the specific ball entering means, the specific ball entering means and the non-specific ball entering means that can enter the game ball that entered the specific area Specific entrance detecting means (condition establishment detecting means), special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detecting a game ball entering the special starting means The special starting detection means and the main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means are provided, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is a specific ball entering means and a non-specific ball entering means. Regardless of which ball you enter, a certain number of game values (game balls) are given to the player The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, a small hit state in which the variable ball entrance means is opened once or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable ball entrance means is opened for the first time. Whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which the game is opened for a second time longer than the above, or until a specified number of game balls enter the open variable state winning means is defined as one round and this is repeated a specified number of times. In the case of winning or losing lottery, if a small hit is won in the winning or losing lottery, a small hit state is generated, if a big hit is won in the winning or failing lottery, You may apply to the game machine which produces a big hit state.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be understood from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball entering means provided on the game board, a win / win lottery is performed as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, A variable display is provided so that a variable display is provided to teach the result of the winning / disapproving lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-171480).

  Further, as the starting ball entering means, for example, in a configuration including a variable ball entering means for changing the state between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, the variable ball entering means is Shortly before the open state, the advance announcement information indicating that the variable ball entering means is opened is derived, and the state that the variable ball entering means is in the open state, and further, the open state is set. It is easier for the player to recognize how the game ball is entering the variable ball entering means (for example, appealing that the game ball is easier to enter the variable ball entering means). There is such a technology.

  By the way, in general, the variable ball entering means is configured to be in an open state when winning a ball entering support lottery performed based on a specific opportunity, and the variable ball entering means after the specific opportunity occurs. There is a time lag until is opened (variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery is performed, and after the variable display is stopped, the variable ball entry means is opened) It is like this.

  Therefore, the variable ball entering means may be opened even in a situation where the game ball is not fired. In other words, even though the player determines that the player does not need to fire the game ball and has stopped the game ball from being fired, the opening notice may be given, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. There is a concern that it will end up. In particular, even if the game ball is launched after recognizing the advance notice, the game ball is closed before it reaches the variable ball entry means. It may become stronger.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the release notice from being derived at a timing that offends the player. To provide a machine.

Means A-1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
A variable ball entering means configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter,
A variable ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable ball means,
Based on the detection of the variable entrance detection means, a winning / winning lottery process for performing a winning / winning lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and a prize ball process for paying out a game value to the player. A gaming machine in which at least one is played,
When the variable ball entering means is in the open state, before the variable ball entering means is in the open state, the advance notice of opening indicating that the variable ball entering means is in the open state And an opening notice device that can derive
An informing function state in which the opening advance notice is made by the opening advance notice means, and an informing state changing means for changing the state to an informing stop state in which the opening advance notice is not made,
By changing from the firing state in which the game ball is being fired by the firing means, to the firing stop state that has not been fired, or to the firing stop equivalent state preset as a state that is highly likely not fired, A gaming machine, which is configured to be capable of changing from the notification function state to the notification stop state by the notification state changing means.

  According to the means A-1, by deriving the notice of opening notice, the variable ball entering means is opened, and further, the game ball is entering the variable ball entering means which is in the open state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the situation. Therefore, for example, when the game design is performed such that the variable ball entering means is relatively easily opened, it is emphasized that the game ball is easy to enter the variable ball entering means. You can Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game machine is easy to play, and it is possible to promote the increase of repeaters and the increase of one game time. Also, if the ball muscle of the game ball is significantly displaced from the variable ball entering means, it can be corrected.

  On the other hand, the player decides that it is not necessary to fire the game ball (while also knowing that the variable ball entrance means is opened even when the game ball is not fired) Despite the fact that the launch has been stopped, it is appealed that the variable ball entrance means will be opened due to the advance notice (it is forcible to pay attention to the variable ball entrance means that is opened). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable (it is perceived as a dislike as if the player is informing that the player is losing). In particular, it does not make sense to launch the game ball after recognizing the opening notice, or it is not effective enough to launch the game ball when the player decides not to launch the game ball. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the player's emotions are reversed by the notification of opening notice being given in a situation, and the notification of opening notice is annoying and annoying. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by giving the notice of opening.

Incidentally, "provided with a passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined portion of the game area,
Based on the detection of the passage detection means, the main control means performs a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not the variable ball entry means is in the open state, and in the case of winning in the ball entry support lottery. A configuration for causing the variable ball entrance means to be in the open state,
Equipped with a normal display means for performing variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the entry support lottery,
In the normal display means, a variable display corresponding to the entry support lottery is displayed, and when the instruction to win the entry support lottery is given by the stop mode of the variation display, the variable entry The means may be in the open state ".

  When this configuration is adopted, a time lag occurs between the detection of the passage detecting means and the timing when the variable ball entering means is opened based on the detection, so that the game ball can be changed in a non-fired state. The chance that the ball entrance means will be opened will increase. In this regard, by adopting the configuration of the means A-1, it is possible to more prominently achieve the operational effect that it is possible to avoid that the notice of opening notice is derived even at a timing unfavorable to the player. Become.

Means A-2. The time after the notice from when the notice of opening notice is derived to when the variable ball entering means is brought to the open state is
The gaming machine according to the means A-1, wherein the game ball is set to be shorter than the arrival time from when the game ball is launched by the launching means until the game ball reaches the variable ball entering means.

  According to the means A-2, the variable ball entering means is closed before the game ball reaches the variable ball entering means even if the game ball is hurriedly fired upon receiving the notice of opening. The Rukoto. In other words, even if the notice of opening the ball is given while the game ball is not being fired, it is impossible to enter the ball into the variable ball entering means. If you do, it is feared that the interest will be significantly reduced. In this respect, such a concern can be eliminated by adopting a configuration in which, for example, the notice of opening is not derived unless the game ball has been fired, like the means A-1.

  Further, for example, if the after-notice time is longer than the arrival time, in a state where the variable ball entering means may be in the open state, stop firing the game ball and confirm the opening notice. By performing a stop hitting operation of firing a game ball, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is a concern that there may be a relatively large difference in the advantages and disadvantages in the progress of the game between the player who performs the stop striking operation and the player who does not. In this respect, by setting the post-announcement time shorter than the arrival time as in the means A-2, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned stop-stopping operation and suppress the above-mentioned concern.

Means A-3. A base fixed to a position where the player can operate,
An operation part assembled so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the base part,
A touch section, which is provided at a position touched by the player's hand when the player operates the operation section by hand, and which is made of a conductive material,
An urging means for applying an urging force to the operation portion so that the relative position of the operation portion with respect to the base portion becomes a predetermined reference position,
An operation unit including a displacement amount detection unit capable of detecting the displacement amount of the operation unit;
A touch detection unit capable of detecting that the player has touched the touch unit,
The launching means launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the displacement amount of the operation portion detected by the displacement amount detecting means when the touch detection means detects contact with the touch portion. The composition,
The game machine according to the means A-1 or A-2, characterized in that when the contact to the touch portion is not detected by the touch detection means, the notification stop state is set.

  According to the means A-3, in the state where the player is not operating the operating means (the player is not touching the touch part of the operating means), the notification stop state is set. Therefore, for example, the player plays the game. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is uncomfortable by issuing the opening notice in a state where it is determined that it is not necessary to shoot a ball and the hand is intentionally released. In particular, like the configuration of the means A-2, even if the game ball is launched by operating the operating means in a hurry after the notice of opening is derived, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means. When it is not possible, such action and effect will be more remarkably exhibited.

Means A-4. The operating means is provided at a position where the player can operate, and includes stop operation means for stopping the emission of the game ball by the emitting means when the operation is performed by the player,
The gaming machine according to means A-3, wherein the notification stop state is set when the stop operation means is operated.

  According to the means A-4, when the player is operating the stop operation means, the notification stop state is set. Therefore, when the player determines that it is not necessary to fire the game ball and intentionally operates the stop operation means to stop the game ball from being fired, a notice of opening is given to the player, It is possible to avoid such a situation as giving offense.

  It should be noted that "when the non-stop operation detecting means is provided which can detect that the stop operating means is not operated, and the non-stop operation detecting means is performing the detection, the notification stop state is set. May be provided, or "a stop operation detection unit capable of detecting that the stop operation unit is operated is provided, and when the detection by the stop operation detection unit is not performed, the notification stop state is set. It is also possible to say

Means A-5. A forced stop means for displacing the stop operation means to the operation position side when the operation portion is at the reference position,
The game machine according to means A-4, wherein the stop operation means is displaced to a non-operation position by displacing the operation portion from the reference position by a predetermined amount.

  According to the means A-5, when the operation portion is at the reference position, the stop operation means is displaced to the operation position by the forced stop means. Therefore, even if the notification state changing means does not obtain the displacement amount information from the displacement amount detecting means, it is possible to surely grasp that the game ball is not fired based on the fact that the non-stop operation information is not input. You can Therefore, the notification state changing means does not need to perform the process of confirming the displacement amount information, and the control can be simplified.

Means A-6. The touch unit is provided at a position touched by a player's hand when displacing at least the operation unit in the operation unit,
The operation means includes a touch connection means electrically connected to the touch detection means,
When the operation portion is in the reference position, the touch portion and the touch connection means are electrically insulated,
The displacement of the operation portion from the reference position by a predetermined amount allows the touch portion and the touch connection means to be electrically connected, according to any one of means A-3 to A-5. Amusement machine.

  According to the means A-6, when the operation portion is at the reference position, the touch portion and the touch connection means are electrically insulated. Therefore, even if the notification state changing means does not obtain the displacement amount information from the displacement amount detecting means, it can be surely grasped that the game ball has not been launched based on the fact that the touch information is not input. . Therefore, the notification state changing means does not need to perform the process of confirming the displacement amount information, and the control can be simplified.

Means A-7. The operation means is provided with a ground connection means that is electrically grounded and that is electrically insulated from the touch connection means,
When the operation portion is in the reference position, the touch portion and the ground connection means are electrically connected,
The gaming machine according to means A-6, wherein the touch portion and the ground connection means are electrically insulated by displacing the operation portion from the reference position by a predetermined amount.

  According to the means A-7, when the operating portion is at the reference position, the touch portion and the earth connecting means are electrically connected. Therefore, when the player touches the operation unit when starting the game, even if the player is charged with static electricity, the static electricity charged on the player flows to the touch detection means side. Instead, it escapes to the ground through the ground connection means. Therefore, when the player touches the operation unit, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high voltage based on static electricity is applied to the touch detection circuit including the touch detection unit, and touch detection due to static electricity is prevented. It is possible to suppress adverse effects (electrostatic damage, etc.) on circuits and the like.

Means A-8. The post-stop time determination means is provided which can determine whether or not a prescribed time has elapsed since the game ball was not fired by the firing means.
When the post-stop time determination means determines that the specified time has not yet come, the notification function state is maintained, and when the post-stop time determination means determines that the specified time has arrived The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-7, which is brought into the notification stop state.

  According to the means A-8, immediately after the firing of the game ball by the launching means is stopped, the game ball that has been fired up to immediately before that may be located upstream of the variable ball entering means in the game area. There is also a possibility that such a game ball will enter the variable ball entering means if the variable ball entering means is opened at that timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the notice of opening is not issued even though the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of giving a notice of opening notice at the timing when the game ball may enter the variable ball entering means.

  It should be noted that the measurement of the specified time by the post-stop time determination means may be configured to be started by confirming the timing at which the driving of the firing means is stopped, or the driving of the firing means may be stopped. It may be configured to start upon confirmation. In the latter case, the notification function is activated even in the "idle hit" state in which the launch means is driven when the game ball is not set in the launch means, but immediately after the player notices the "idle hit" Since it should be dealt with (stopping the firing operation, setting the game ball in the launching means), there is little effect of being in the notification function state in the "blank hit" state.

Means A-9. A gaming machine in which the winning / winning lottery process is performed based on the detection of the variable entrance detecting means,
Special display means for performing variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the win / no win lottery,
Equipped with effect production means for producing an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-8, which is in the notification stop state when a specific effect is derived by the effect means.

  According to the means A-9, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific effect is obstructed by performing the opening advance notice not having any relation to the specific effect during the specific effect. In particular, the notice of opening notice indicates that the variable ball entering means is brought into an open state, and the specific effect is a special display for teaching the result of the winning / winning lottery based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means. It is an effect corresponding to the variable display in the means. That is, in the case where the specific effect is configured to give a suggestion as to whether or not to win the win / no win, the specific effect is more important information for the player than the notice of opening notice. If the opening notice is duplicated (covered) with the specific effect, the opening notice will interfere with the specific effect, making it difficult to understand the specific effect or being unable to concentrate on the specific effect. Is concerned. In this regard, by configuring so that the opening notice is not issued during the specific effect, it becomes easier to concentrate on the specific effect, and the specific effect can be more thoroughly enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest caused by the release announcement notification being derived by being overlaid on a specific effect, and more reliably preventing a situation in which the release announcement notification has a negative image. it can. Furthermore, by performing the opening notice during the specific performance, it is possible to avoid the situation that the opening notice is misunderstood as a part of the specific performance (good news), resulting in disappointment. .

  Further, when the specific effect is an effect with a high expectation of occurrence of a special game state, it is conceivable that the player refrains from firing the game ball (stops the firing) during the particular effect. That is, when the specific effect has been derived, it is highly possible that the game ball has not been fired. Therefore, by setting the state in which the specific effect is derived to be the “emission stop equivalent state”, with regard to the control of the notification state change means, the game ball is controlled even if the control for directly grasping the emission state of the emission means is not performed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no possibility that a game ball will enter the variable ball entering means since it has not been fired, or even if it is very low, a notice of opening notice is given. Therefore, for example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the configurations of the means A-2 to A-8 are not used together, and in that case, the control of the notification state changing means is performed based on the firing state of the firing means. Control can be simplified because it is not necessary to perform it.

  It should be noted that it is also possible to "be in the notification stop state when a specific effect suggesting the result of the variable display being performed by the special display means is derived in the effect producing means". In this case, while the information (specific effect) that is of high importance to the player is being derived, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest caused by deriving information of low importance (announcement notice). The action and effect such as is made more remarkable.

  Means A-10. The means A is characterized in that when the specified time elapses after the variable display of the identification information on the special display means is started and the variable display of the identification information is not ended, the notification stop state is set. A gaming machine described in -9.

  Generally, in the special display means, when instructing that a special game state is won, in order to improve performance, it is necessary to change the display time of the identification information (change time ) Is made longer, and the change time may be made longer even if the winning is not won so that the winning can not be easily discriminated during the variable display of the identification information. Further, also in the rendering means, "a rendering with a high degree of expectation that a special game state occurs" is derived in the portion where the variation time is extended.

  Therefore, like the means A-10, the "high-expectation effect in which a special game state occurs", which is a highlight, is defined as a "specific effect", and the opening notice is not issued during the effect. Then, it becomes possible to further enjoy such production. Further, in the means A-10, it is determined whether or not "a production with a high degree of expectation that a special game state occurs" has been derived based on whether or not a prescribed time has elapsed since the start of variable display. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform a common process for determining whether or not a plurality of types of specific effects have been derived. Therefore, the control can be simplified.

  In addition, the notification stop state is set not after the start of the variable display from which the specific effect is derived, but after the specific effect is started. Therefore, the "specific effect" is derived due to the fact that it is recognized that the advance notice is not accompanied even though the variable ball entrance means is opened immediately after the variable display starts. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is understood in advance.

Means A-11. When the variable entrance detection means is detected, a winning / winning lottery for whether or not to generate the special game state is performed, and a main control means for generating the special game state based on the result of the winning / winning lottery. When,
In a gaming machine provided with a special display means for performing variable display of identification information for teaching the result of the win / loss lot,
When the variable entrance detection means is detected, information acquisition means for acquiring the win / loss related information on the win / loss lottery,
A pending storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win / loss related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the hit / miss related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means,
When the variable ball detection unit detects the variable information during the variable display of the identification information on the special display unit, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is a change of the identification information being executed. It is a configuration performed after the display,
With respect to the hold display displayed on the hold display means, a prefetch hold effect capable of suggesting the contents of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the hold display is configured to be derivable,
The gaming machine according to the means A-9 or A-10, characterized in that the notification stop state is set when the look-ahead hold effect is derived in the hold display means.

  According to the means A-11, the player uses the prefetching hold effect as the specific effect on the hold display means and the variable display of the identification information of the special display means which is currently being performed (effect of the effect means corresponding thereto). You can concentrate and enjoy yourself. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sound effect of the notification of opening notice is misunderstood as the sound effect of the look-ahead hold effect to make the user happy.

  It should be noted that it is not necessary to set the notification stop state for all types of the look-ahead hold effect, and for example, only when the look-ahead hold effect having a relatively high expectation of occurrence of the special game state is derived, the notification stop state is set. You may comprise.

Means A-12. Provided at a position operable by the player, and provided with a production operation means capable of switching the production mode in the production means according to the operation,
In the effect operation effective state in which the operation of the effect operation means is effective as a trigger for switching the effect mode, the notification stop state is set, and any one of means A-9 to A-11 is described. Game machine.

  According to the means A-12, while the player is being prompted to operate the effect operation means, a notice of opening notice unrelated to the effect is given, so that the player can give notice of the notice of opening. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the user is confused about what should be done, or is expected to have an excessive expectation, because he or she thinks it by associating it with the production operation means.

Means A-13. A first ball entering state in which the time during which the variable ball entering means is in the open state per predetermined time is set to a first time;
There is a second ball entering state in which the time during which the variable ball entering means is in the open state around the predetermined time is set to a second time longer than the first time,
The gaming machine according to any one of A-9 to A-12, wherein at least in the second ball entering state, the notification stop state is set when the specific effect is derived by the effect means.

  When the second ball entry state is set as in the means A-13, it is conceivable that in the second ball entry state, the game ball is continued to be fired even if the specific effect starts. That is, even if the game balls are continuously fired, it is considered that the loss is more likely to occur because the game balls frequently enter the second ball entering means and the ball loss is reduced, and the variable display is interrupted. A player or a player who feels that the number of balls is increasing instead of losing balls will continue to shoot the game balls. Therefore, in the second ball entering state, just because the game ball is being shot does not mean that the specific effect is not likely to be derived.

  Therefore, in the first ball entering state, when the specific effect is derived, the game ball may be stopped from being fired, and the notification may be stopped, so that the player may concentrate on the specific effect. In the ball entering state, the game ball continues to be fired and the advance notice is given even if the specific effect is derived.Furthermore, the variable advance means is easily opened so that the notice of the release is given. Opportunities may increase significantly, and it is conceivable that the advance notice will be frequently derived during the specific performance. Therefore, at least in the second ball entering state, if the specific effect is performed as in the above-mentioned means A-9, by adopting the configuration of switching to the notification stop state, the specific effect can be more thoroughly enjoyed. The function and effect of being asked to be obtained will be more reliably exhibited.

Means A-14. (When the detection of the variable entrance detection means is performed, a win / loss lottery for determining whether or not to generate the special game state is performed, and a main control for generating the special game state based on a result of the win / loss lot Means and
In a gaming machine provided with a special display means for performing variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / winning lottery
When the variable entrance detection means is detected, information acquisition means for acquiring the win / loss related information on the win / loss lottery,
And a pending storage unit having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win / loss related information acquired by the information acquisition unit,
In a state where the winning / discarding related information is stored in all the storage areas of the holding storage unit, when the variable entrance detecting unit is detected, the winning / discarding related information corresponding to the detection is stored. Not configured,
14. The notification stop state is set when the number of the storage areas in which the hit-or-miss information is stored is equal to or greater than a specified number, and the notification stop state is set. Amusement machine.

  According to the means A-14, since there is an upper limit to the number of hit / fail related information that can be held and stored in the hold storage means, basically, when the upper limit of the hold / store of the hit / fail related information approaches, In order not to exceed the upper limit, operations such as stopping the firing of game balls are performed. In this way, by setting the notification stop state in a situation in which it is highly likely that the player has stopped firing the game ball, a situation in which the release notice is derived even though the game ball is not firing Can be suppressed.

Means A-15. When the variable sphere detection means is detected, a variable sphere teaching means for teaching that the game sphere has entered the variable sphere is provided.
In both of the notification function state and the notification stop state, when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the teaching of the variable ball teaching means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to A-14.

  According to the means A-15, for example, when the teaching of the variable ball teaching means is stopped due to the notification stop state, the player is given a game ball to the variable ball means this time. It is possible to avoid a situation in which there is anxiety that whether or not the amount of entering the ball has been reliably detected.

Means A-16. An open state teaching means for teaching that the variable ball entering means is in the open state,
In both the notification function state and the notification stop state, when the variable ball entering means is in the open state, the teaching of the open state teaching means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to A-15.

  According to the means A-16, for example, when the teaching of the open state teaching means is stopped due to the information stop state, the variable ball entering means which has been opened this time is given to the player. It is possible to avoid a situation in which even if a game ball is thrown in, there is a fear that it will be processed as usual.

Means A-17. When the variable entrance detection means is detected, a winning / winning lottery for whether or not to generate the special game state is performed, and a main control means for generating the special game state based on the result of the winning / winning lottery. When,
A sub-control means for performing various controls based on information from the main control means,
Firing control means for driving and controlling the firing means,
In the gaming machine controlled by the sub control means, the opening advance notice means is
A base fixed to a position where the player can operate,
An operation part assembled so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the base part,
A touch portion made of a conductive material,
An urging means for applying an urging force to the operation portion so that the relative position of the operation portion with respect to the base portion becomes a predetermined reference position,
A displacement amount detecting means capable of detecting the displacement amount of the operation portion,
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate, and a stop operating means for stopping the firing of the game ball by the launching means when the player is performing an operation,
Touch detection means capable of detecting that the player has touched the touch portion,
A non-stop operation detection means capable of detecting that the stop operation means is not operated,
The firing control unit is configured to be capable of inputting displacement amount information by the displacement amount detection unit, touch information by the touch detection unit, and non-stop operation information by the non-stop operation detection unit, and the firing control unit. Indicates that, in a state where the touch information and the non-stop operation information are input, the touch information and the non-stop operation information are input to the main control unit. It is configured to output firing status information,
The main control means is configured to be capable of outputting, to the launch control means, launch permission information for permitting the launch of a game ball by the launch means in a state where the launch state information is input,
The launch control means causes the launch means to launch a game ball with a strength according to the displacement amount information in a state where the touch information, the non-stop operation information, and the launch permission information are input. And
The main control means is configured to be able to output information related to the firing state information to the sub control means in a state where the firing state information is input. A gaming machine according to any one of A to A-16.

  According to the means A-17, the main control means and the sub-control means surely grasp whether or not the game ball is in a fired state by inputting the firing state information and information related thereto. can do. Further, the main control means receives the firing information including the touch information and the non-stop operation information from the firing control means, and therefore outputs the firing permission information to the firing control means or fires it to the sub control means. In the control of outputting the information related to the state information, for example, it is not necessary to determine whether the touch information and the non-stop operation information are input, respectively, and the control can be simplified. In the present means, the sub-control means constitutes the notification state changing means.

Means A-18. The variable ball entering means includes a vane member that is displaceable between an open position that allows a game ball to enter the variable ball entering means and a closed position that regulates the ball.
A state in which the blade member is in the closed position, the blade member is provided with pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position (a position other than the closed position),
18. The game according to any one of the means A-1 to A-17, characterized in that the opening advance notice notifying means performs the opening advance notice by making at least the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. Machine.

  According to the means A-18, since the opening advance notice for notifying in advance that the variable ball entering means is opened is derived in the variable ball entering means itself, the opening advance announcement and the variable ball entering means. You can strengthen the connection with. Further, since the opening advance notice includes at least the pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member is present in the open position, the opening advance notice notifies that the variable ball entrance means is opened. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the advance notification. Further, even if the pseudo blade opening mode is derived, the blade member is not actually displaced to the open position. Therefore, for example, even if the blade member is only set to the open position for the purpose of presentation, the timing when the blade position is set to the open position is set. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.

  B. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a win / no win lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit state is generated, and the win / loss is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-171480).

  Further, the display mode of the display device, the voice mode of the speaker, and the like are controlled to be switched depending on various game states. By the way, depending on the timing of switching to a predetermined effect / notification state, the player may be offended.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of switching the effect / notification state according to the gaming status of the player. .

Means B-1. (Fire) operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Launching means for launching a game ball according to the operation of the operating means,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
A start ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball means,
Based on the detection of the starting entry detecting means, a win / win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and a main control for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / loss lot Means and
Special display means for performing variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the win / no win lottery,
Effect means capable of deriving an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display means,
A sub-control means for controlling the effect means based on information from the main control means,
Firing control means for driving and controlling the firing means,
A launch condition detecting means for detecting whether or not a predetermined launch condition of the launch means is satisfied,
A structure in which a game ball is launched by the launching means in a state where the establishment of the predetermined launching condition is detected by the launching condition detecting means,
When the firing condition detection means detects that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied, the sub-control means is configured to be able to input information indicating that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the means B-1, it becomes possible for the sub-control means to grasp whether or not the predetermined firing condition of the firing means is satisfied. For this reason, for example, it is possible to change the effect state (or notification state) of the effect means according to the information on the emission state of the emission means such as whether or not the player operates the operation means. In particular, the firing state of the launching means is also directly connected to the behavior of the player (the operating state of the operating means), and it is possible to perform an effect close to the player (taking intent). As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production causes stress to the player, such as refraining from useless production for the player at that time, and it is possible to progress the game more comfortably.

Means B-2. A passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined portion of the game area,
The starting entry means is configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter.
Based on the detection of the passage detection means, the main control means performs a ball entry support lottery on whether or not the starting ball entry means is in the open state, and when the player wins in the ball entry support lottery. A configuration for causing the starting ball entering means to be in the open state,
The sub control means,
When the starting ball entering means is in the open state, before the starting ball entering means is in the open state, the opening advance notice indicating that the starting ball entering means is in the open state And an opening notice device that can derive
An informing function state in which the opening advance notice is made by the opening advance notice means, and an informing state changing means for changing the state to an informing stop state in which the opening advance notice is not made,
The game machine according to the means B-1, wherein the information is stopped when the information indicating that the predetermined launch condition is satisfied is not input to the sub-control means.

  According to the means B-2, by deriving the notice of opening notice, the starting ball entering means is in the open state, and further, the game ball has entered the starting ball entering means in the open state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the situation. Therefore, for example, when the game design is performed such that the starting ball entering means is relatively easily opened, it is emphasized that the game ball is easily entering the starting ball entering means. Alternatively, if the ball muscle of the game ball is significantly deviated from the starting ball entering means, it can be corrected.

  On the other hand, even though the player has decided that it is not necessary to launch the game ball and has stopped the launch of the game ball, the start ball entry means is opened by the notice of opening notice. Is appealing (it is forced to pay attention to the starting entry means that is in the open state), and gives the player discomfort (whether the player is informing that he is losing). It is possible to avoid such a situation. In particular, it does not make sense to launch the game ball after recognizing the opening notice, or it is not effective enough to launch the game ball when the player decides not to launch the game ball. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the player's emotions are reversed by the notification of opening notice being given in a situation, and the notification of opening notice is annoying and annoying. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by giving the notice of opening.

Means B-3. The time after the notice from when the notice of opening notice is derived to when the starting ball entering means is brought to the open state is
It is set to be shorter than the arrival time from when the game ball is launched by the launching means until the game ball reaches the starting entry means.
By changing from the state in which the game ball is being launched by the launching unit to the state in which it is not being launched, the notification state changing unit is configured to be able to change the state from the notification function state to the notification stop state. The gaming machine according to the means B-2, which is characterized in that

  According to the means B-3, although the player determines that the player does not need to shoot the game ball and stops the game ball from being launched, the start notice means is provided by issuing the opening notice. It is appealing that it will be in the open state (it will be forced to pay attention to the starting entry means that is in the open state), and it will give the player discomfort (notifying that the player is losing) It is possible to avoid such a situation that it is perceived as having a bad taste. In particular, even if the game ball is hurriedly fired upon receiving the notice of opening, the starting ball entering means is closed before the game ball reaches the variable ball entering means. It is feared that if the advance notice is issued in a situation where the fireworks have not been launched, the interest will be significantly reduced. In this respect, such a concern can be eliminated by adopting a configuration in which the opening advance notice is not derived unless the game ball is fired, as in the present means B-3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by giving the notice of opening.

  Also, for example, if the after-notice time is longer than the arrival time, in the state where the starting ball entering means may be opened, stop firing the game ball and confirm the opening notice By performing a stop striking operation of firing a game ball, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the starting ball entering means. Therefore, there is a concern that there may be a relatively large difference in the advantages and disadvantages in the progress of the game between the player who performs the stop striking operation and the player who does not. In this respect, by setting the post-notice time to be shorter than the arrival time as in the means B-3, it is possible to suppress the stopping operation and suppress the concern.

Means B-4. The operating means is
A base fixed to a position where the player can operate,
An operation part assembled so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the base part,
A touch portion made of a conductive material,
An urging means for applying an urging force to the operation portion so that the relative position of the operation portion with respect to the base portion becomes a predetermined reference position,
A displacement amount detecting means capable of detecting the displacement amount of the operation portion,
Provided at a position where the player can operate, and a stop operation means for stopping the emission of the game ball by the emission means when the operation by the player is performed,
Touch detection means capable of detecting that the player has touched the touch portion,
A non-stop operation detection means capable of detecting that the stop operation means is not operated,
The firing control means includes the firing condition detection means, and is configured to be capable of inputting displacement amount information by the displacement amount detection means, touch information by the touch detection means, and non-stop operation information by the non-stop operation detection means. In addition, while the touch information and the non-stop operation information are being input, the touch information as the predetermined firing condition and the non-stop operation information are output to the main control means. Configured to be possible,
The main control means, in a state where the touch information and the non-stop operation information are input, can output, to the launch control means, launch permission information for permitting launch of a game ball by the launch means. Composed,
The launch control means causes the launch means to launch a game ball with a strength according to the displacement amount information in a state where the touch information, the non-stop operation information, and the launch permission information are input. And
The main control means is configured to be able to output the touch information and the non-stop operation information to the sub-control means in a state where the touch information and the non-stop operation information are input. The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4, the sub control means can surely grasp the touch information and the non-stop operation information from the firing control means via the main control means. The firing control means may individually output the touch information and the information indicating that the non-stop operation information is input to the main control means, or both the touch information and the non-stop operation information. When is input, information indicating that may be output to the main control means. In the case of individually outputting, the main control means can individually output the touch information and the non-stop operation information to the sub control means. For example, in the sub control means, there is touch information and the non-stop operation is performed. If there is no information, it is possible to make an announcement for beginners such as "a game ball is launched when the hand is released from the stop operation means".

Means B-5. The firing control means is configured to be able to output the displacement amount information to the main control means,
The gaming machine according to means B-4, wherein the main control means is configured to be able to output the displacement amount information to the sub control means.

  According to the means B-5, the display means controlled by the sub-control means can derive a display for asking the strength of the game ball to be launched again. Therefore, it is possible to more finely assist the game of the player. In addition, for example, in a configuration in which a desired launch position (strength) of a game ball changes according to a game state, for example, a ball entering a predetermined ball entering means arranged at an undesired position in the game area ( It is possible to suppress a situation in which the launched game ball is wasted, as compared with a configuration in which an announcement is made that the launch position is re-detected.

Means B-6. A forced stop means for displacing the stop operation means to the operation position side when the operation portion is at the reference position,
The game machine according to the means B-4 or B-5, wherein the stop operation means is displaced to a non-operation position by displacing the operation portion by a predetermined amount from the reference position.

  According to the means B-6, when the operation portion is at the reference position, the stop operation means is displaced to the operation position by the forced stop means. Therefore, even if the sub-control unit does not obtain the displacement amount information from the displacement amount detecting unit, it can be surely grasped that the game ball has not been launched based on the fact that the non-stop operation information is not input. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to output the displacement amount information to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit does not perform the process of confirming the displacement amount information, and the control can be simplified.

Means B-7. The touch unit is provided at a position touched by a player's hand when displacing at least the operation unit in the operation unit,
The operation means includes a touch connection means electrically connected to the touch detection means,
When the operation portion is in the reference position, the touch portion and the touch connection means are electrically insulated,
7. The gaming machine according to the means B-4 to B-6, wherein the touch portion and the touch connection means are electrically connected by displacing the operation portion from the reference position by a predetermined amount.

  According to the means B-7, when the operation portion is at the reference position, the touch portion and the touch connection means are electrically insulated. Therefore, even if the sub-control unit does not obtain the displacement amount information from the displacement amount detecting unit, it can be surely grasped that the game ball has not been launched based on the fact that the touch information is not input. Therefore, it is not necessary to output the displacement amount information to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit does not perform the process of confirming the displacement amount information, and the control can be simplified.

Means B-8. The operation means is provided with a ground connection means that is electrically grounded and that is electrically insulated from the touch connection means,
When the operation portion is in the reference position, the touch portion and the ground connection means are electrically connected,
The gaming machine according to means B-7, wherein the touch portion and the ground connection means are electrically insulated by displacing the operation portion from the reference position by a predetermined amount.

  According to the means B-8, when the operating portion is at the reference position, the touch portion and the earth connecting means are electrically connected. Therefore, when the player touches the operation unit when starting the game, even if the player is charged with static electricity, the static electricity charged on the player flows to the touch detection means side. Instead, it escapes to the ground through the ground connection means. Therefore, when the player touches the operation unit, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high voltage based on static electricity is applied to the touch detection circuit including the touch detection unit, and touch detection due to static electricity is prevented. It is possible to suppress adverse effects (electrostatic damage, etc.) on circuits and the like.

Means B-9. The sub-control means, when the state in which the variable display of the identification information in the special display means is stopped and displayed continues for a specified time, is configured to shift the effecting means to a standby state,
When the information indicating that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied is input to the sub-control unit, the control for shifting the rendering unit to the standby state is canceled. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to B-8.

  According to the means B-9, although the player continues to shoot the game ball, unfortunately the game ball does not enter the starting ball entering means and the effecting means shifts to the standby state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is very offended.

  Means B-10. When determining whether or not to derive a specific effect, the sub control means determines whether or not information indicating that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied is input to the sub control means. However, the gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-9, wherein the probability of deriving the specific effect is different depending on whether it is input or not.

  According to the means B-10, it is possible to associate the derivation probability of a specific effect with the operation state of the player with respect to the operation means, and to derive an effect that matches the state of the player as much as possible. it can. For example, when the player is operating the operation means, when deriving an effect that requests the player to operate an "effect operation means" different from the operation means, the operation means is requested to the player by the operation means. There is a concern that the player will feel irritated or may make an operation mistake in the operating means, but the effect depending on the operating state of the operating means It is possible to suppress or avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience by determining whether or not to lead it out.

  In addition, for example, when the specific effect is an effect in which the expectation of occurrence of the special game state is moderately increased, it is determined whether or not the player is interested in the effect based on the operation state of the operation means. However, it is also possible to configure so as to determine the content (development) of the effect.

Means B-11. Provided at a position operable by the player, and provided with a production operation means capable of switching the production mode in the production means according to the operation,
The specific effect is an effect in which the effect means changes to a specific mode based on an operation of the effect operation means,
When determining whether or not to derive the specific effect, when the information indicating that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied is input to the sub control unit, and when the information is not input. The gaming machine according to the means B-10, characterized in that the probability of deriving the specific effect is lower than that in the above.

  According to the means B-11, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player has to simultaneously operate the operation means and the effect operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling impatient or inviting an operation error of the operation means. It should be noted that, when it is determined not to derive the specific effect due to the operation of the operation means, it is desirable that a substitute effect is derived.

Means B-12. The starting entry means is configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter.
A first ball entering state in which the time during which the starting ball entering means is in the open state for a predetermined time is set to a first time;
There is a second ball entering state in which the time during which the starting ball entering means is in the open state around the predetermined time is set to a second time longer than the first time,
In the second ball entering state, the specific effect is derived in the case where information indicating that the predetermined firing condition is satisfied is input to the sub-control unit than in the first ball entering state. The gaming machine according to the means B-10 or B-11, characterized in that the probability of causing it is set to be high.

  In the second ball entering state in which it is possible to continue to shoot the game ball like the means B-12, even if the game ball is being shot, a specific effect is derived so as to specify the turning angle. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the opportunity to derive the effect is lost or is significantly reduced.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example, "operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching There is a ball game machine provided with a game area in which the game balls are guided, and each of the ball winning means (general winning device, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game region.

  b. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball-and-ball game machine having a game area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example, "operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface or the like) which is guided by the game balls and extends substantially in the vertical direction, and each ball entering means (general winning device, which is arranged in the game area). Variable winning device, actuating port, etc.), and is configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the game area.

  c. The gaming machine or the ball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43a ... 1st special display device, 43b ... 2 Special display device, 261, ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device.

Claims (2)

Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Launching means for launching a game ball according to the operation of the operating means,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
A start ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball means,
Based on the detection of the starting entry detecting means, a win / win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and a main control for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / loss lot Means and
Special display means for performing variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the win / no win lottery,
Effect means capable of deriving an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display means,
A sub-control means for controlling the effect means based on information from the main control means,
Firing control means for driving and controlling the firing means,
A launch condition detecting means for detecting whether or not a predetermined launch condition of the launch means is satisfied,
A structure in which a game ball is launched by the launching means in a state where the establishment of the predetermined launching condition is detected by the launching condition detecting means,
When the establishment of the predetermined launch condition is detected by the launch condition detection unit, it is possible to input information indicating that the predetermined launch condition is established to the sub-control unit ,
A passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined portion of the game area,
The starting entry means is configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter.
Based on the detection of the passage detection means, the main control means performs a ball entry support lottery on whether or not the starting ball entry means is in the open state, and when the player wins in the ball entry support lottery. A configuration for causing the starting ball entering means to be in the open state,
The sub control means,
When the starting ball entering means is in the open state, before the starting ball entering means is in the open state, the opening advance notice indicating that the starting ball entering means is in the open state And an opening notice device that can derive
An informing function state in which the opening advance notice is made by the opening advance notice means, and an informing state changing means for changing the state to an informing stop state in which the opening advance notice is not made,
A game machine, characterized in that, when information indicating that the predetermined launch condition is satisfied is not input to the sub-control unit, the notification stop state is set . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images